JP6964269B2 - Transmission method, transmitter, receiver and receiver - Google Patents

Description

The present invention particularly relates to a precoding method, a precoding device, a transmitting method, a transmitting device, a receiving method, and a receiving device that perform communication using a multi-antenna.

Conventionally, as a communication method using a multi-antenna, for example, there is a communication method called MIMO (Multiple-Input Multiple-Output). In multi-antenna communication represented by MIMO, the communication speed of data is increased by modulating each of a plurality of series of transmission data and transmitting each modulation signal from different antennas at the same time.

FIG. 28 shows an example of the configuration of the transmission / reception device when the number of transmission antennas is 2, the number of reception antennas is 2, and the number of transmission modulation signals (transmission streams) is 2. In the transmitting device, the encoded data is interleaved, the interleaved data is modulated, frequency conversion or the like is performed to generate a transmission signal, and the transmission signal is transmitted from the antenna. At this time, the spatial multiplex MIMO method is a method in which different modulated signals are transmitted from the transmitting antenna to the same frequency at the same time.

At this time, Patent Document 1 proposes a transmitting device having a different interleaving pattern for each transmitting antenna. That is, in the transmission device of FIG. 28, the two interleaves (πa, πb) have different interleave patterns. Then, in the receiving device, as shown in Non-Patent Document 1 and Non-Patent Document 2, the reception quality is improved by repeatedly performing the detection method using the soft value (MIMO detector in FIG. 28). Will be done.

By the way, as a model of the actual propagation environment in wireless communication, there are an NLOS (non-line of light) environment represented by a Rayleigh fading environment and a LOS (line of light) environment represented by a rice fading environment. When transmitting a single modulated signal in the transmitting device, performing maximum ratio synthesis on the signals received by multiple antennas in the receiving device, and demodulating and decoding the signal after maximum ratio synthesis, the LOS environment, In particular, in an environment where the rice factor indicating the magnitude of the received power of the direct wave with respect to the received power of the scattered wave is large, good reception quality can be obtained. However, depending on the transmission method (for example, the spatial multiplex MIMO transmission method), there arises a problem that the reception quality deteriorates as the rice factor increases. (See Non-Patent Document 3)
In FIGS. 29A and 29B, LDPC (low-density party-check) -encoded data is 2 × 2 in a ray-fading environment and a rice-fading environment with rice factors K = 3, 10, and 16 dB. (2 antenna transmission, 2 antenna reception) An example of simulation results of BER (Bit Error Rate) characteristics (vertical axis: BER, horizontal axis: SNR (signal-to-noise power ratio)) in the case of spatial multiplex MIMO transmission is shown. ing. FIG. 29 (A) shows the BER characteristics of Max-log-APP (see Non-Patent Document 1 and Non-Patent Document 2) (APP: a posterior privacy) without repeated detection, and FIG. 29 (B) shows repeated detection. It shows the BER characteristics of the detected Max-log-APP (see Non-Patent Document 1 and Non-Patent Document 2) (repetition number 5 times). As can be seen from FIGS. 29 (A) and 29 (B), it can be confirmed that the reception quality deteriorates as the rice factor increases in the spatial multiplex MIMO system regardless of whether or not the repeated detection is performed. From this, it is possible to have a problem peculiar to the spatial multiplex MIMO system, which is not found in the conventional single modulated signal transmission system, that "the spatial multiplex MIMO system deteriorates the reception quality when the propagation environment becomes stable". Recognize.

Broadcasting and multicast communication are services for users within the line of sight, and the radio wave propagation environment between the receiver and the broadcasting station possessed by the user is often the LOS environment. When a spatial multiplex MIMO system having the above-mentioned problems is used for broadcasting or multicast communication, a phenomenon occurs in the receiver that the reception electric field strength of radio waves is high, but the service cannot be received due to deterioration of reception quality. there is a possibility. That is, in order to use the spatial multiplex MIMO system in broadcasting and multicast communication, it is desired to develop a MIMO transmission method that can obtain a certain level of reception quality in both the NLOS environment and the LOS environment.

Non-Patent Document 8 describes a method of selecting a codebook (precoding matrix) to be used for precoding from feedback information from a communication partner. However, as described above, a communication partner is used as in broadcasting or multicast communication. There is no mention of how to precode in situations where feedback from is not available.

On the other hand, Non-Patent Document 4 describes a method of switching the precoding matrix with time, which can be applied even when there is no feedback information. In this document, it is described that a unitary matrix is used as the matrix used for precoding and that the unitary matrix is randomly switched. However, the application method for the deterioration of reception quality in the LOS environment shown above is described. It is not mentioned at all, it only mentions switching randomly. As a matter of course, there is no description about the precoding method for improving the deterioration of the reception quality in the LOS environment and the method for constructing the precoding matrix.

International Publication No. 2005/050885

“Achieving near-capacity on a multiple-antenna channel” IEEE Transition on communications, vol. 51, no. 3, pp. 389-399, March 2003. "Performance analysis and design optimization of LDPC-coded MIMO OFDM systems" IEEE Transfers. Signal Processing. , Vol. 52, no. 2, pp. 348-361, Feb. 2004. "BER performance evolution in 2x2 MIMO spatial multiplexing systems under Rician fading channels," IEICE Transfers. Fundamentals, vol. E91-A, no. 10, pp. 2798-2807, Oct. 2008. "Turbo space-time codes with time variing linear transformations," IEEE Trans. Wireless communications, vol. 6, no. 2, pp. 486-493, Feb. 2007. "Likelihood function for QR-MLD likelihood for soft-decision turbo decoding and it performance," IEICE Transfer. Commun. , Vol. E88-B, no. 1, pp. 47-57, Jan. 2004. "Signpost to Shannon Limits:" Parallel Concatenate (Turbo) coding "," Turbo (interactive) coding "and its surroundings" Institute of Electronics, Information and Communication Engineers, Confidential Technique IT98-51 “Advanced signal processing for PLCs: Wavelet-OFDM,” Proc. of IEEE International symposium on ISPLC 2008, pp. 187-192, 2008. D. J. Love, and R. W. heath, Jr. , “Limited feedback unitary precoding for partial multiplexing systems,” IEEE Trans. Inf. Theory, vol. 51, no. 8, pp. 2967-1976, Aug. 2005. DVB Document A122, Framing structure, channel coding and modulation for a second generation digital terrestrial terrestrial terrestrial telecasting system, m (DVB) L. Vangelista, N. et al. Benvenuto, and S. Tomasin, "Key technology for next-generation terrestrial digital television standard DVB-T2," IEEE Commun. Magazine, vo. 47, no. 10, pp. 146-153, Oct. 2009. T. Ohgane, T.M. Nishimura, and Y. Ogawa, "Application of space division multiplexing and this performance in a MIMO channel," IEICE Transfer. Commun. , Vo. 88-B, no. 5, pp. 1843-1851, May 2005. R. G. Gallager, “Low-density parity-check codes,” IRE Trans. Inform. Theory, IT-8, pp-21-28, 1962. D. J. C. Mackay, “Good error-correcting codes based on very space matrix,” IEEE Trans. Inform. Theory, vol. 45, no. 2, pp399-431, March 1999. ETSI EN 302 307, “Second generation framing structure, channel coding and modulation systems for broadband, interactivity servicing, interactivity” 1.1.2, June 2006. Y. -L. Weng, and C.I. -C. Cheng, “a fast-convergence decoding method and memory-effective VLSI architect architecture for irregular LDPC codes in the IEEE200.EEE82.16eStand” 1255-1259.

An object of the present invention is to provide a MIMO system capable of improving reception quality in a LOS environment.

In order to solve such a problem, the precoding method according to one aspect of the present invention simultaneously transmits signals based on a plurality of selected modulation methods represented by in-phase components and orthogonal components to the same frequency band. A precoding method for generating a plurality of precoded signals, in which one precoding weight matrix is regularly switched and selected from a plurality of precoding weight matrices, and the selected precoding weight matrix is selected. The plurality of precoded signals are generated by multiplying the signals based on the plurality of selected modulation schemes.

According to each aspect of the present invention described above, it is used for precoding by transmitting and receiving a signal precoded by one precoding weight matrix selected while regularly switching from a plurality of precoding weight matrices. Since the precoding weight matrix is one of a plurality of predetermined precoding weight matrices, the reception quality in the LOS environment can be improved according to the design of the plurality of precoding weight matrices.

As described above, according to the present invention, since it is possible to provide a precoding method, a precoding device, a transmission method, a reception method, a transmission device, and a reception device for improving the deterioration of reception quality in the LOS environment, broadcasting and multicast communication It is possible to provide high-quality services to users within the line of sight.

Example of configuration of transmitter / receiver in spatial multiplex MIMO transmission system An example of frame configuration Precoding weight switching method Example of transmitter configuration when applied Precoding weight switching method Example of transmitter configuration when applied Example of frame configuration Example of precoding weight switching method Configuration example of receiver Configuration example of the signal processing unit of the receiving device Configuration example of the signal processing unit of the receiving device Decryption processing method Example of reception status BER characteristic example Precoding weight switching method Example of transmitter configuration when applied Precoding weight switching method Example of transmitter configuration when applied Example of frame configuration Example of frame configuration Example of frame configuration Example of frame configuration Example of frame configuration Position of poor reception quality Position of poor reception quality An example of frame configuration An example of frame configuration An example of mapping method An example of mapping method Example of configuration of weighted composite unit An example of how to rearrange symbols Example of configuration of transmitter / receiver in spatial multiplex MIMO transmission system BER characteristic example Example of spatial multiplexing 2x2 MIMO system model Position of poor reception Position of poor reception Position of poor reception Position of poor reception Position of poor reception Example of minimum distance characteristics in the complex plane of poor reception Example of minimum distance characteristics in the complex plane of poor reception Position of poor reception Position of poor reception An example of the configuration of the transmission device according to the seventh embodiment An example of the frame configuration of the modulated signal transmitted by the transmitter Position of poor reception Position of poor reception Position of poor reception Position of poor reception Position of poor reception An example of frame configuration on the time-frequency axis An example of frame configuration on the time-frequency axis Signal processing method Modulation signal configuration when using spatiotemporal block code Detailed example of frame configuration on the time-frequency axis An example of a transmitter configuration An example of the configuration of the modulation signal generation units # 1 to # M in FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a configuration of an OFDM method-related processing unit (5207_1 and 5207_2) in FIG. Detailed example of frame configuration on the time-frequency axis An example of the configuration of the receiving device FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a configuration of an OFDM method-related processing unit (5600_X, 5600_Y) in FIG. Detailed example of frame configuration on the time-frequency axis An example of a broadcasting system Position of poor reception Example of frame configuration An example of frame configuration on the time-frequency axis An example of a transmitter configuration An example of frame configuration on the frequency-time axis Example of frame configuration An example of how to arrange symbols An example of how to arrange symbols An example of how to arrange symbols An example of frame configuration Frame configuration on the time-frequency axis An example of frame configuration on the time-frequency axis An example of a transmitter configuration An example of the configuration of the receiving device An example of the configuration of the receiving device An example of the configuration of the receiving device An example of frame configuration on the frequency-time axis An example of frame configuration on the frequency-time axis Example of precoding matrix allocation Example of precoding matrix allocation Example of precoding matrix allocation An example of the configuration of the signal processing unit An example of the configuration of the signal processing unit An example of a transmitter configuration Overall configuration of digital broadcasting system Block diagram showing a configuration example of the receiver The figure which shows the structure of the multiplexed data A diagram schematically showing how each stream is multiplexed in the multiplexed data. A more detailed diagram of how a video stream is stored in a PES packet string. The figure which shows the structure of TS packet and source packet in multiplexed data The figure which shows the data structure of PMT The figure which shows the internal structure of the multiplexed data information Diagram showing the internal structure of stream attribute information Configuration diagram of video display and audio output device The figure which shows the baseband signal exchange part

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
(Embodiment 1)
The transmission method, transmission device, reception method, and reception device of the present embodiment will be described in detail.

Before giving this description, an outline of a transmission method and a decoding method in a spatial multiplex MIMO transmission system which is a conventional system will be described.
The configuration of the N _{t x N r} spatial multiplex MIMO system is shown in FIG. The information vector z is coded and interleaved. Then, as the interleaved output, the vector u = (u ₁ , ..., U _Nt ) of the coded bits is obtained. _{However, u i = (u i1,} ..., u iM) to (M: the number of transmission bits per symbol). Transmit vector _{s = (s 1, ...,} s Nt) represents from a transmitting antenna #i and ^T and the transmission signal _{s i = map (u i)} , when normalized transmission energy ^{_{E {| s i | 2}}} = Es / represented and Nt _{(E s:} total energy per channel). Then, if the reception vector is y = (y ₁ , ..., y _Nr ) ^T , it is expressed as in Eq. (1).

At this _{time, H NtNr} channel _{matrix, n = (n 1, ...} , n Nr) T is the noise vector, _{n i} is zero mean, variance sigma ² of i. i. d. Complex Gaussian noise. From the relationship between the transmission symbol and the reception symbol introduced by the receiver, the probability regarding the reception vector can be given by a multidimensional Gaussian distribution as in Eq. (2).

Here, consider a receiver including an outer soft-in / soft-out decoder and MIMO detection, which performs iterative decoding as shown in FIG. The log-likelihood ratio vector (L-value) in FIG. 1 is expressed by Eqs. (3)-(5).

<Repeat detection method>
Here, _{iterative detection of MIMO signals in an N t} xN _r spatial multiplex MIMO system will be described.

The log-likelihood ratio of x _mn is defined as in Eq. (6).

From Bayes' theorem, equation (6) can be expressed as equation (7).

However, U _{mn, ± 1} = {u | _umn = ± 1}. And lnΣa _j ~ max
When approximated by ln a _j , equation (7) can be approximated as equation (8). The symbol "~" above means an approximation.

P in formula _{(8) (u | u mn} ) and ln P _{(u |} u _mn) is expressed as follows.

By the way, the logarithmic probability of the equation defined in the equation (2) is expressed as in the equation (12).

Therefore, from the formulas (7) and (13), in MAP or APP (a posteriori probability), the posterior L-value is expressed as follows.

Hereinafter, it is referred to as repeated APP decoding. Further, from the equations (8) and (12), in the log-likelihood ratio (Max-Log APP) based on the Max-Log approximation, the subsequent L-value is expressed as follows.

Hereinafter, it will be referred to as repeated Max-log APP decoding. Then, the external information required by the iterative decoding system can be obtained by subtracting the pre-input from the equation (13) or (14).
<System model>
FIG. 28 shows the basic configuration of the system leading to the following description. Here, a 2 × 2 spatial multiplexing MIMO system is used, streams A and B each have an outer encoder, and the two outer encoders have the same LDPC code encoder (here, an LDPC code encoder is used as the outer encoder). However, the error correction code used by the outer encoder is not limited to the LDPC code, and other error correction codes such as a turbo code, a convolutional code, and an LDPC convolutional code may be used in the same manner. Further, the outer encoder is configured to be provided for each transmitting antenna, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of transmitting antennas may be used, or one outer encoder may be provided, and transmission may be performed. It may have more outer encoders than the number of antennas). Then, each of the streams A and B has an interleaver (π _a , π _b ). Here, the modulation method is 2 ^h- QAM (h bits are transmitted with one symbol).

The receiver shall perform iterative detection (repeated APP (or Max-log APP) decoding) of the above-mentioned MIMO signal. Then, as the decoding of the LDPC code, for example, sum-product decoding is performed.

FIG. 2 shows the frame configuration and describes the order of the symbols after interleaving.
At this time, as shown in the following expression _{(i a,} j _a), shall represent _{(i b, j} b).

At this _{time, i a,} i _b: The order of symbols after _{interleaving, j a,} j _b: bit positions in the modulation scheme _{(j a, j b = 1} , ···, h), π a, π b: Stream a, B of the _{^{interleaver, Ω a ia, ja, Ω}} b ib, jb: stream a, indicate the order of the data before interleaving B. However, FIG. 2 _shows a frame configuration when the _i a = i _b.
<Repeat decoding>
Here, the sum-product decoding and the iterative detection algorithm of the MIMO signal used for decoding the LDPC code in the receiver will be described in detail.

The sum-produce decoding binary MxN matrix H = {H _mn } is used as the inspection matrix of the LDPC code to be decoded. Subsets A (m) and B (n) of the set [1, N] = {1, 2, ..., N} are defined as follows.

At this time, A (m) means a set of column indexes that are 1 in the mth row of the check matrix H, and B (n) is a set of row indexes that are 1 in the nth row of the check matrix H. .. The algorithm for sum-produce decoding is as follows.
Step A ・ 1 (Initialization): The _{prior value logarithmic ratio β mn} = 0 is set for all sets (m, n) satisfying _{H mn = 1.} The loop variable (number of iterations) is set to l _sum = 1, and the maximum number of loops is set _{to l sum, max.}
Step A ・ 2 (row processing): External value logarithm using the following update formula for all pairs (m, n) that satisfy _{H mn} = 1 in the order of m = 1, 2, ..., M. The ratio α _mn is updated.

At this time, f is a function of Gallager. Then, _{how to obtain λ n} will be described in detail below.
Step A ・ 3 (column processing): External value logarithm using the following update formula for all pairs (m, n) satisfying _{H mn} = 1 in the order of n = 1, 2, ..., N. The ratio β _mn is updated.

Step A ・ 4 (Calculation of log-likelihood ratio): For _n ∈ [1, N], find the log-likelihood ratio L n as follows.

Step A ・ 5 (counting the number of repetitions): If l _sum <l _{sum, max} , _{increment l sum} and return to step A ・ 2. When l _sum = l _{sum, max} , this sum-produce decoding is completed.

The above is the operation of one sum-product decoding. After that, repeated detection of the MIMO signal is performed. Variable m used in the description of the operation of the aforementioned sum-product _{decoding, n, α mn, β mn} , at λ _{n, L n,} the variables in the stream _{A m a, n a, α} a mana, β a mana, λ _{na, L na,} variables _m b in the stream ^{_{B, n b, α b mbnb}} , β b mbnb, λ nb, shall be represented by _{L nb.}
<Repeated detection of MIMO signal>
_{Here, a method of obtaining λ n} in the iterative detection of a MIMO signal will be described in detail.

From equation (1), the following equation holds.

From the frame configuration of FIG. 2, the following relational expressions are established from the equations (16) and (17).

At this time, n _a , n _b ∈ [1, N]. _{In the following, λ na} , L _na , λ _nb , and L _nb when the number of iterations of the repeated detection of the MIMO signal is k are expressed as λ _{k, na} , L _{k, na} , λ _{k, nb} , L _{k, nb, respectively.} And.

Step B ・ 1 (Initial detection; k = 0): At the time of initial detection, λ _{0, na} , λ _{0, nb} are obtained as follows.
For iterative APP decoding:

During iterative Max-log APP decoding:

However, it is assumed that X = a and b. Then, the number of repetitions of the repeated detection of the MIMO signal is set to l _mimo = 0, and the maximum number of repetitions is set _{to l mimo, max.}
Step B ・ 2 (repeated detection; number of repetitions k): λ _{k, na} , λ _{k, nb} when the number of repetitions k is from equations (11) (13)-(15) (16) (17). It is expressed as 31)-(34). However, (X, Y) = (a, b) (b, a).
For iterative APP decoding:

During iterative Max-log APP decoding:

Step B ・ 3 (counting the number of iterations, estimating codewords): If l _mimo <l _{mimo, max} , _{increment l mimo} and return to step B ・ 2. In the case of l _mimo = l _{mimo, max} , the estimated codeword is determined as follows.

However, it is assumed that X = a and b.
FIG. 3 is an example of the configuration of the transmission device 300 according to the present embodiment. The coding unit 302A receives the information (data) 301A and the frame configuration signal 313 as inputs, and the frame configuration signal 313 (error correction method, coding rate, block length, etc. used by the coding unit 302A for error correction coding of data). The method specified by the frame configuration signal 313 is used. The error correction method may be switched.) According to, for example, a convolution code, an LDPC code, a turbo code, etc. Data 303A after error correction coding
Is output.

The interleaver 304A receives the encoded data 303A and the frame configuration signal 313 as inputs, performs interleaving, that is, rearranges the order, and outputs the interleaved data 305A. (The interleaving method may be switched based on the frame configuration signal 313.)
The mapping unit 306A receives the interleaved data 305A and the frame configuration signal 313 as inputs, and applies QPSK (Quadrature Phase Shift Keying), 16QAM (16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation), 64QAM (64 Quadrature Modulation), 64QAM (64 Quadrature), etc. Output signal 307A. (The modulation method may be switched based on the frame configuration signal 313.)
FIG. 24 is an example of a mapping method in the IQ plane of the in-phase component I and the orthogonal component Q constituting the baseband signal in QPSK modulation. For example, as shown in FIG. 24 (A), when the input data is "00", I = 1.0 and Q = 1.0 are output, and similarly, when the input data is "01", I = -1.0, Q = 1.0 is output, ..., Is output. FIG. 24 (B) is an example of a mapping method in the IQ plane of QPSK modulation different from FIG. 24 (A), and the point that FIG. 24 (B) is different from FIG. 24 (A) is in FIG. 24 (A). The signal point shown in FIG. 24 (B) can be obtained by rotating the signal point around the origin. Such a method of rotating the constellation is shown in Non-Patent Document 9 and Non-Patent Document 10, and even if the Cyclic Q Delay shown in Non-Patent Document 9 and Non-Patent Document 10 is applied. good. As another example from FIG. 24, FIG. 25 shows the arrangement of signal points in the IQ plane at 16QAM, and an example corresponding to FIG. 24 (A) is FIG. 25 (A) and FIG. 24 (B). An example corresponding to is shown in FIG. 25 (B).

The coding unit 302B receives the information (data) 301B and the frame configuration signal 313 as inputs, and includes information such as the frame configuration signal 313 (error correction method to be used, coding rate, block length, etc.), and the frame configuration signal 313. The method specified by is used. Further, the error correction method may be switched.) According to, for example, error correction coding such as a convolution code, an LDPC code, a turbo code, etc. is performed, and the data after encoding is performed. Output 303B.

The interleaver 304B receives the encoded data 303B and the frame configuration signal 313 as inputs, performs interleaving, that is, rearranges the order, and outputs the interleaved data 305B. (The interleaving method may be switched based on the frame configuration signal 313.)
The mapping unit 306B receives the interleaved data 305B and the frame configuration signal 313 as inputs, and applies QPSK (Quadrature Phase Shift Keying), 16QAM (16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation), 64QAM (64 Quadrature Modulation), 64QAM (64 Quadrature Modulation), 64QAM (64 Quadrature), etc. Output signal 307B. (The modulation method may be switched based on the frame configuration signal 313.)
The weighting synthesis information generation unit 314 receives the frame configuration signal 313 as an input, and outputs information 315 regarding the weighting synthesis method based on the frame configuration signal 313. The weighted synthesis method is characterized in that the weighted synthesis method is regularly switched.

The weighted synthesis unit 308A receives the baseband signal 307A, the baseband signal 307B, and the information 315 regarding the weighted synthesis method as inputs, and weight-synthesizes the baseband signal 307A and the baseband signal 307B based on the information 315 regarding the weighted synthesis method. The signal 309A after the weighted synthesis is output. note that. The details of the weighting composition method will be described in detail later.

The radio unit 310A receives the signal 309A after weighting and synthesis, performs processing such as quadrature modulation, band limitation, frequency conversion, and amplification, outputs the transmission signal 311A, and the transmission signal 511A is output as a radio wave from the antenna 312A. NS.

The weighted synthesis unit 308B receives the baseband signal 307A, the baseband signal 307B, and the information 315 regarding the weighted synthesis method as inputs, and weight-synthesizes the baseband signal 307A and the baseband signal 307B based on the information 315 regarding the weighted synthesis method. The signal 309B after weighted synthesis is output.

FIG. 26 shows the configuration of the weighting synthesis unit. The baseband signal 307A is multiplied by w11 (t) to generate w11 (t) s1 (t) and multiplied by w21 (t) to generate w21 (t) s1 (t). Similarly, the baseband signal 307B is multiplied by w12 (t) to generate w12 (t) s2 (t) and multiplied by w22 (t) to generate w22 (t) s2 (t). Next, z1 (t) = w11 (t) s1 (t) + w12 (t) s2 (t) and z2 (t) = w21 (t) s1 (t) + w22 (t) s2 (t) are obtained.

The details of the weighting synthesis method will be described in detail later.
The radio unit 310B takes the signal 309B after weighted synthesis as an input, performs processing such as quadrature modulation, band limitation, frequency conversion, and amplification, outputs the transmission signal 311B, and the transmission signal 511B is output as a radio wave from the antenna 312B. NS.

FIG. 4 shows a configuration example of the transmission device 400 different from that of FIG. In FIG. 4, a part different from FIG. 3 will be described.
The coding unit 402 receives the information (data) 401 and the frame configuration signal 313 as inputs, performs error correction coding based on the frame configuration signal 313, and outputs the encoded data 402.

The distribution unit 404 takes the encoded data 403 as an input, distributes the data 403, and outputs the data 405A and the data 405B. Note that FIG. 4 describes a case where there is only one coding unit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the coding unit is m (m is an integer of 1 or more), and the code created by each coding unit is used. The present invention can also be carried out in the same manner when the distribution unit outputs the converted data by dividing it into two systems of data.

FIG. 5 shows an example of a frame configuration on the time axis of the transmission device according to the present embodiment. The symbol 500_1 is a symbol for notifying the receiving device of the transmission method. For example, an error correction method used for transmitting a data symbol, information on its coding rate, and a modulation method used for transmitting the data symbol. Information etc. is transmitted.

The symbol 501_1 is a symbol for estimating the channel variation of the modulated signal z1 (t) {where t is the time} transmitted by the transmitting device. The symbol 502_1 is a data symbol transmitted by the modulation signal z1 (t) to the symbol number u (on the time axis), and the symbol 503_1 is a data symbol transmitted by the modulation signal z1 (t) to the symbol number u + 1.

The symbol 501_2 is a symbol for estimating the channel variation of the modulated signal z2 (t) {where t is the time} transmitted by the transmitting device. The symbol 502_2 is a data symbol transmitted by the modulation signal z2 (t) to the symbol number u, and the symbol 503_2 is a data symbol transmitted by the modulation signal z2 (t) to the symbol number u + 1.

The relationship between the modulated signal z1 (t) and the modulated signal z2 (t) transmitted by the transmitting device and the received signals r1 (t) and r2 (t) in the receiving device will be described.
In FIG. 5, 504 # 1 and 504 # 2 indicate a transmitting antenna in the transmitting device, 505 # 1 and 505 # 2 indicate a receiving antenna in the receiving device, and the transmitting device transmits the modulated signal z1 (t) to the transmitting antenna 504. # 1, the modulation signal z2 (t) is transmitted from the transmission antenna 504 # 2. At this time, it is assumed that the modulated signal z1 (t) and the modulated signal z2 (t) occupy the same (common) frequency (band). The channel fluctuations of each transmitting antenna of the transmitting device and each antenna of the receiving device are set to h11 (t), h12 (t), h21 (t), and h22 (t), respectively, and the reception received by the receiving antenna 505 # 1 of the receiving device. Assuming that the signal is r1 (t) and the received signal received by the receiving antenna 505 # 2 of the receiving device is r2 (t), the following relational expression is established.

FIG. 6 is a diagram related to the weighting method (precoding method) in the present embodiment, and the weighting synthesis unit 600 is a weighting composition unit in which both the weighting composition units 308A and 308B of FIG. 3 are integrated. be. As shown in FIG. 6, streams s1 (t) and streams s2 (t) correspond to the baseband signals 307A and 307B of FIG. 3, that is, bases according to the mapping of modulation schemes such as QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM. The band signal has in-phase I and quadrature Q components. Then, as in the frame configuration of FIG. 6, the stream s1 (t) represents the signal of the symbol number u as s1 (u), the signal of the symbol number u + 1 as s1 (u + 1), and so on. Similarly, the stream s2 (t) represents the signal with the symbol number u as s2 (u), the signal with the symbol number u + 1 as s2 (u + 1), and so on. Then, the weighting synthesis unit 600 inputs the base band signals 307A (s1 (t)) and 307B (s2 (t)) in FIG. 3 and the information 315 regarding the weighting information, and uses the weighting method according to the information 315 regarding the weighting information. Then, the signals 309A (z1 (t)) and 309B (z2 (t)) after the weighted synthesis of FIG. 3 are output. At this time, z1 (t) and z2 (t) are represented as follows.
When the symbol number is 4i (i is an integer of 0 or more):

However, j is an imaginary unit.
When the symbol number is 4i + 1:

When the symbol number is 4i + 2:

When the symbol number is 4i + 3:

As described above, the weighted synthesis unit of FIG. 6 regularly switches the precoding weight in a 4-slot cycle. (However, here, the precoding weight is regularly switched in 4 slots, but the number of slots that are regularly switched is not limited to 4 slots.)
By the way, Non-Patent Document 4 describes that the precoding weight is switched for each slot, and Non-Patent Document 4 is characterized by randomly switching the precoding weight. On the other hand, the present embodiment is characterized in that the precoding weights are regularly switched by providing a certain period, and in a 2-by-2 precoding weight matrix composed of 4 precoding weights, 4 The absolute values of the two precoding weights are equal (1 / sqrt (2)), and the precoding weight matrix having this feature is regularly switched.

In the LOS environment, the use of a special precoding matrix may greatly improve the reception quality, but the special precoding matrix differs depending on the direct wave conditions. However, there is a certain rule in the LOS environment, and if a special precoding matrix is regularly switched according to this rule, the data reception quality is greatly improved. On the other hand, if the precoding matrix is switched randomly, there is a possibility that there may be a precoding matrix other than the special precoding matrix mentioned above, and only a biased precoding matrix that is not suitable for the LOS environment. There is also the possibility of precoding, which does not necessarily mean L
Good reception quality is not always obtained in the OS environment. Therefore, it is necessary to realize a precoding switching method suitable for the LOS environment, and the present invention proposes a precoding method related thereto.

FIG. 7 shows an example of the configuration of the receiving device 700 according to the present embodiment. The radio unit 703_X receives the received signal 702_X received by the antenna 701_X as an input, performs processing such as frequency conversion and orthogonal demodulation, and outputs the baseband signal 704_X.

The channel variation estimation unit 705_1 of the modulated signal z1 transmitted by the transmission device takes the baseband signal 704_X as an input, extracts the reference symbol 501_1 for channel estimation in FIG. 5, and obtains a value corresponding to h11 in the equation (36). Estimate and output the channel estimation signal 706_1.

The channel variation estimation unit 705_2 in the modulated signal z2 transmitted by the transmission device takes the baseband signal 704_X as an input, extracts the reference symbol 501_2 for channel estimation in FIG. 5, and sets a value corresponding to h12 in the equation (36). Estimate and output the channel estimation signal 706_2.

The radio unit 703_Y receives the received signal 702_Y received by the antenna 701_Y as an input, performs processing such as frequency conversion and orthogonal demodulation, and outputs a baseband signal 704_Y.
The channel variation estimation unit 707_1 in the modulated signal z1 transmitted by the transmission device takes the baseband signal 704_Y as an input, extracts the reference symbol 501_1 for channel estimation in FIG. 5, and sets a value corresponding to h21 in the equation (36). Estimate and output the channel estimation signal 708_1.

The channel variation estimation unit 707_2 in the modulated signal z2 transmitted by the transmission device takes the baseband signal 704_Y as an input, extracts the reference symbol 501_2 for channel estimation in FIG. 5, and sets a value corresponding to h22 in the equation (36). Estimate and output the channel estimation signal 708_2.

The control information decoding unit 709 receives the baseband signals 704_X and 704_Y as inputs, detects the symbol 500_1 for notifying the transmission method of FIG. 5, and outputs the signal 710 regarding the information of the transmission method notified by the transmission device.

The signal processing unit 711 receives the baseband signals 704_X, 704_Y, the channel estimation signals 706_1, 706_2, 708_1, 708_2, and the signal 710 related to the transmission method information notified by the transmission device as inputs, detects and decodes them, and receives the received data. Outputs 712_1 and 712_2.

Next, the operation of the signal processing unit 711 of FIG. 7 will be described in detail. FIG. 8 shows an example of the configuration of the signal processing unit 711 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is mainly composed of an INNER MIMO detection unit, a soft-in / soft-out decoder, and a weighting coefficient generation unit. The method of iterative decoding in this configuration is described in detail in Non-Patent Document 2 and Non-Patent Document 3, but the MIMO transmission method described in Non-Patent 2 and Non-Patent Document 3 is a spatial multiplex MIMO transmission method. However, the transmission method in the present embodiment is different from Non-Patent Document 2 and Non-Patent Document 3 in that it is a MIMO transmission method in which the precoding weight is changed with time. The (channel) matrix in equation (36) is H (t), the precoding weight matrix in FIG. 6 is W (t) (however, the precoding weight matrix changes depending on t), and the reception vector is R (t) =. (R1 (t), r2 (t)) ^T , stream vector S (t) = (s1 (t), s2 (t)) If ^T , the following relational expression holds.

At this time, the receiving device can apply the decoding methods of Non-Patent Document 2 and Non-Patent Document 3 to R (t) of the reception vector by considering H (t) W (t) as a channel matrix. can.
Therefore, the weighting coefficient generation unit 819 of FIG. 8 inputs the signal 818 (corresponding to 710 of FIG. 7) regarding the information of the transmission method notified by the transmission device, and outputs the signal 820 of the information of the weighting coefficient.

The INNNER MIMO detection unit 803 receives a signal 820 related to the information of the weighting coefficient as an input, and uses this signal to perform the calculation of the equation (41). Then, iterative detection / decoding will be performed, and the operation will be described.

In the signal processing unit of FIG. 8, it is necessary to perform the processing method as shown in FIG. 10 in order to perform iterative decoding (repetitive detection). First, one codeword (or one frame) of the modulated signal (stream) s1 and one codeword (or one frame) of the modulated signal (stream) s2 are decoded. As a result, from the soft-in / soft-out decoder, one codeword (or one frame) of the modulated signal (stream) s1 and one codeword (or one frame) of the modulated signal (stream) s2 are each. The log-likelihood ratio of bits (LLR: Log-Likelihood Ratio) is obtained. Then, the detection / decoding is performed again using the LLR. This operation is performed multiple times (this operation is called iterative decoding (repetitive detection)). Hereinafter, a method of creating a log-likelihood ratio (LLR) of a symbol at a specific time in one frame will be mainly described.

In FIG. 8, the storage unit 815 includes a baseband signal 801X (corresponding to the baseband signal 704_X in FIG. 7), a channel estimation signal group 802X (corresponding to the channel estimation signals 706_1 and 706_2 in FIG. 7), and a baseband. In order to realize iterative decoding (repeated detection) by inputting the signal 801Y (corresponding to the baseband signal 704_Y in FIG. 7) and the channel estimation signal group 802Y (corresponding to the channel estimation signals 708_1 and 708_2 in FIG. 7). Then, H (t) W (t) in the equation (41) is executed (calculated), and the calculated matrix is stored as a modified channel signal group. Then, the storage unit 815 outputs the above signals as a baseband signal 816X, a modified channel estimation signal group 817X, a baseband signal 816Y, and a modified channel estimation signal group 817Y when necessary.

Subsequent operations will be described separately for the case of initial detection and the case of iterative decoding (repetitive detection).
<In the case of initial detection>
The INNER MIMO detection unit 803 inputs the baseband signal 801X, the channel estimation signal group 802X, the baseband signal 801Y, and the channel estimation signal group 802Y. Here, the modulation method of the modulated signal (stream) s1 and the modulated signal (stream) s2 will be described as 16QAM.

First, the INNER MIMO detection unit 803 executes H (t) W (t) from the channel estimation signal group 802X and the channel estimation signal group 802Y to obtain a candidate signal point corresponding to the baseband signal 801X. The situation at that time is shown in FIG. In FIG. 11, ● (black circle) is a candidate signal point in the IQ plane, and since the modulation method is 16QAM, there are 256 candidate signal points. (However, since FIG. 11 shows an image diagram, 256 candidate signal points are not shown.) Here, the 4 bits transmitted by the modulated signal s1 are b0, b1, b2, b3, and the modulated signal s2. Assuming that the 4 bits to be transmitted are b4, b5, b6, and b7, there are candidate signal points corresponding to (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) in FIG. Then, the square Euclidean distance between the received signal point 1101 (corresponding to the baseband signal 801X) and each of the candidate signal points is obtained. Then, each square Euclidean distance is divided by the ^{noise variance σ 2.} Therefore, a value obtained by dividing the candidate signal points and a received signal point square Euclidean distances corresponding with the variance of noise (b0, b1, b2, b3 , b4, b5, b6, b7) E X (b0, b1, b2 , B3, b4, b5, b6, b7). The baseband signals and the modulated signals s1 and s2 are complex signals.

Similarly, H (t) W (t) is executed from the channel estimation signal group 802X and the channel estimation signal group 802Y to find the candidate signal point corresponding to the baseband signal 801Y, and the reception signal point (corresponding to the baseband signal 801Y). The squared Euclidean distance with () is obtained, and this squared Euclidean distance is divided by the ^{noise dispersion σ 2.} Therefore, a value obtained by dividing candidate signal points and a received signal point square Euclidean distance variance of the noise corresponding to (b0, b1, b2, b3 , b4, b5, b6, b7) E Y (b0, b1, b2 , B3, b4, b5, b6, b7).

_{Then, E X (b0, b1,} b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) + E Y (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) = E (b0, b1, b2, b3 , B4, b5, b6, b7).

The INNER MIMO detection unit 803 outputs E (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) as a signal 804.
The log-likelihood calculation unit 805A takes the signal 804 as an input, calculates the log-likelihood of the bits b0 and b1 and b2 and b3, and outputs the log-likelihood signal 806A. However, in the calculation of the log-likelihood, the log-likelihood when it is "1" and the log-likelihood when it is "0" are calculated. The calculation method is as shown in the formula (28), the formula (29), and the formula (30), and the details are shown in Non-Patent Document 2 and Non-Patent Document 3.

Similarly, the log-likelihood calculation unit 805B takes the signal 804 as an input, calculates the log-likelihood of the bits b4 and b5 and b6 and b7, and outputs the log-likelihood signal 806B.
The deinterleaver (807A) takes the log-likelihood signal 806A as an input, performs deinterleave corresponding to the interleaver (interleaver (304A) in FIG. 3), and outputs the log-likelihood signal 808A after the deinterleave.

Similarly, the deinterleaver (807B) takes the log-likelihood signal 806B as an input, performs deinterleave corresponding to the interleaver (interleaver (304B) in FIG. 3), and outputs the log-likelihood signal 808B after the deinterleave.

The log-likelihood ratio calculation unit 809A takes the deinterleaved log-likelihood signal 808A as an input and calculates the log-likelihood ratio (LLR: Log-Likelihood Ratio) of the bits encoded by the encoder 302A of FIG. Then, the log-likelihood ratio signal 810A is output.

Similarly, the log-likelihood ratio calculation unit 809B takes the deinterleaved log-likelihood signal 808B as an input, and the log-likelihood ratio (LLR: Log-Likelihood Ratio) of the bits encoded by the encoder 302B of FIG. ) Is calculated, and the log-likelihood ratio signal 810B is output.

The Soft-in / soft-out decoder 811A takes the log-likelihood ratio signal 810A as an input, performs decoding, and outputs the log-likelihood ratio 812A after decoding.
Similarly, the Soft-in / soft-out decoder 811B takes the log-likelihood ratio signal 810B as an input, performs decoding, and outputs the log-likelihood ratio 812B after decoding.

<In the case of iterative decoding (repetitive detection), the number of iterations k>
The interleaver (813A) inputs the log-likelihood ratio 812A after decoding obtained by the k-1st soft-in / soft-out decoding, performs interleaving, and outputs the log-likelihood ratio 814A after interleaving. .. At this time, the interleaving pattern of the interleaving (813A) is the same as the interleaving pattern of the interleaving (304A) of FIG.

The interleaver (813B) inputs the log-likelihood ratio 812B after decoding obtained by the k-1st soft-in / soft-out decoding, performs interleaving, and outputs the log-likelihood ratio 814B after interleaving. .. At this time, the interleaving pattern of the interleaving (813B) is the same as the interleaving pattern of the interleaving (304B) of FIG.

The INNER MIMO detection unit 803 inputs the baseband signal 816X, the modified channel estimation signal group 817X, the baseband signal 816Y, the modified channel estimation signal group 817Y, the log likelihood ratio 814A after interleaving, and the log likelihood ratio 814B after interleaving. And. Here, instead of the baseband signal 801X, the channel estimation signal group 802X, the baseband signal group 801Y, and the channel estimation signal group 802Y, the baseband signal 816X, the modified channel estimation signal group 817X, the baseband signal group 816Y, and the modified channel estimation signal group 817Y. Is used because there is a delay time due to iterative decoding.

The difference between the operation during repeated decoding of the INNER MIMO detection unit 803 and the operation during initial detection is that the log-likelihood ratio 814A after interleaving and the log-likelihood ratio 814B after interleaving are used for signal processing. Is. The INNNER MIMO detection unit 803 first obtains E (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) as in the case of initial detection. In addition, the coefficients corresponding to the equations (11) and (32) are obtained from the log-likelihood ratio 814A after interleaving and the log-likelihood ratio 914B after interleaving. Then, the value of E (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) is corrected by using the obtained coefficient, and the value is corrected by E'(b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5). , B6, b7) and output as a signal 804.

The log-likelihood calculation unit 805A takes the signal 804 as an input, calculates the log-likelihood of the bits b0 and b1 and b2 and b3, and outputs the log-likelihood signal 806A. However, in the calculation of the log-likelihood, the log-likelihood when it is "1" and the log-likelihood when it is "0" are calculated. The calculation method is as shown in the formula (31), the formula (number 32), the formula (33), the formula (34), and the formula (35), and is shown in Non-Patent Document 2 and Non-Patent Document 3. There is.

Similarly, the log-likelihood calculation unit 805B takes the signal 804 as an input, calculates the log-likelihood of the bits b4 and b5 and b6 and b7, and outputs the log-likelihood signal 806B. The operation after the demodulator is the same as the initial detection.

Note that FIG. 8 shows the configuration of the signal processing unit when performing repeated detection, but repeated detection is not necessarily an essential configuration for obtaining good reception quality, and is a configuration portion required only for repeated detection. , The configuration may not have interleavers 813A and 813B. At this time, the INNNER MIMO detection unit 803 does not perform repetitive detection.
Then, an important part in the present embodiment is to perform the calculation of H (t) W (t). As shown in Non-Patent Document 5 and the like, initial detection and repeated detection may be performed using QR decomposition.

Further, as shown in Non-Patent Document 11, even if the linear calculation of MMSE (Minimum Mean Square Error) and ZF (Zero Forcing) is performed based on H (t) W (t) and the initial detection is performed. good.

FIG. 9 has a configuration of a signal processing unit different from that of FIG. 8, and is a signal processing unit for the modulated signal transmitted by the transmitting device of FIG. The difference from FIG. 8 is the number of soft-in / soft-out decoders. The soft-in / soft-out decoder 901 takes the log-likelihood ratio signals 810A and 810B as inputs, performs decoding, and after decoding. The log-likelihood ratio 902 is output. The distribution unit 903 receives the log-likelihood ratio 902 after decoding as an input and distributes. For the other parts, the operation is the same as in FIG.

FIG. 12 shows the BER characteristics when the transmission method is the transmission method using the precoding weight of the present embodiment under the same conditions as in FIG. 29. FIG. 12 (A) shows the BER characteristics of Max-log-APP (see Non-Patent Document 1 and Non-Patent Document 2) (APP: a posterior productivity) without repeated detection, and FIG. 12 (B) shows repeated detection. It shows the BER characteristics of the detected Max-log-APP (see Non-Patent Document 1 and Non-Patent Document 2) (repetition number 5 times). Comparing FIGS. 12 and 29, it can be seen that when the transmission method of this embodiment is used, the BER characteristics when the rice factor is large are significantly improved as compared with the BER characteristics when spatial multiplex MIMO transmission is used. , The effectiveness of the method of this embodiment can be confirmed.

As described above, when the transmitting device of the MIMO transmission system transmits a plurality of modulated signals from a plurality of antennas as in the present embodiment, the precoding weight is switched over time and the switching is performed regularly. In the LOS environment where the direct wave is dominant, the effect of improving the transmission quality can be obtained as compared with the case of using the conventional spatial multiplex MIMO transmission.

In the present embodiment, in particular, the configuration of the receiving device has been described by limiting the number of antennas, but it can be similarly implemented even if the number of antennas increases. That is, the number of antennas in the receiving device does not affect the operation and effect of the present embodiment. Further, in the present embodiment, the LDPC code has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decoding method is also limited to the sum-produce decoding as an example as a soft-in / soft-out decoder. There are other methods for decoding soft-in / soft-out, such as BCJR algorithm, SOVA algorithm, and Msx-log-MAP algorithm. Details are shown in Non-Patent Document 6.

Further, in the present embodiment, the single carrier method has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the same can be performed even when multicarrier transmission is performed. Therefore, for example, a spectrum diffusion communication method, an OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiplexing) method, and an SC-FDMA (Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiplexing) method.
The same can be applied to the case of using Access), SC-OFDM (Single Carrier Orthogonal Frequency Multiplexing) method, wavelet OFDM method shown in Non-Patent Document 7 and the like. Further, in the present embodiment, symbols other than the data symbols, for example, pilot symbols (preambles, unique words, etc.), symbols for transmitting control information, and the like may be arranged in the frame in any manner.

Hereinafter, as an example of the multi-carrier method, an example when the OFDM method is used will be described.
FIG. 13 shows the configuration of the transmission device when the OFDM method is used. In FIG. 13, the same reference numerals are given to those operating in the same manner as in FIG.

The OFDM system-related processing unit 1301A receives the weighted signal 309A as an input, performs OFDM system-related processing, and outputs a transmission signal 1302A. Similarly, the OFDM system-related processing unit 1301B takes the weighted signal 309B as an input and outputs a transmission signal 1302B.

FIG. 14 shows an example of the configuration of the OFDM system-related processing units 1301A and 1301B and later in FIG. 13, and the parts related to 1301A to 312A in FIG. 13 are 1401A to 1410A and parts related to 1301B to 312B. Is 1401B to 1410B.

The serial-parallel conversion unit 1402A performs serial-parallel conversion of the weighted signal 1401A (corresponding to the weighted signal 309A in FIG. 13) and outputs a parallel signal 1403A.

The rearrangement unit 1404A receives the parallel signal 1403A as an input, performs rearrangement, and outputs the rearranged signal 1405A. The sorting will be described in detail later.
The inverse fast Fourier transform unit 1406A takes the rearranged signal 1405A as an input, performs the inverse fast Fourier transform, and outputs the signal 1407A after the inverse Fourier transform.

The radio unit 1408A receives the signal 1407A after the inverse Fourier transform as an input, performs processing such as frequency conversion and amplification, outputs a modulated signal 1409A, and the modulated signal 1409A is output as a radio wave from the antenna 1410A.
The serial-parallel conversion unit 1402B performs serial-parallel conversion of the weighted signal 1401B (corresponding to the weighted signal 309B in FIG. 13) and outputs the parallel signal 1403B.

The rearrangement unit 1404B receives the parallel signal 1403B as an input, performs rearrangement, and outputs the rearranged signal 1405B. The sorting will be described in detail later.
The inverse fast Fourier transform unit 1406B takes the rearranged signal 1405B as an input, performs the inverse fast Fourier transform, and outputs the signal 1407B after the inverse Fourier transform.

The radio unit 1408B receives the signal 1407B after the inverse Fourier transform as an input, performs processing such as frequency conversion and amplification, outputs a modulated signal 1409B, and the modulated signal 1409B is output as a radio wave from the antenna 1410B.

Since the transmission device of FIG. 3 is not a transmission method using a multi-carrier, the precoding is switched so as to have four cycles as shown in FIG. 6, and the symbols after the precoding are arranged in the time axis direction. When a multi-carrier transmission method such as the OFDM method as shown in FIG. 13 is used, naturally, the symbols after precoding are arranged in the time axis direction as shown in FIG. 3, and they are arranged for each (sub) carrier. However, in the case of the multi-carrier transmission method, a method of arranging the transmissions in the frequency axis direction or using both the frequency axis and the time axis can be considered. This point will be described below.

FIG. 15 shows an example of a method of rearranging the symbols in the rearrangement units 1401A and 1401B of FIG. 14 on the horizontal axis frequency and the vertical axis time, and the frequency axes are from (sub) carrier 0 to (sub) carrier 9. The modulated signals z1 and z2 use the same frequency band at the same time (time), and FIG. 15 (A) shows a method of rearranging the symbols of the modulated signal z1 and FIG. 15 (B). Indicates a method of rearranging the symbols of the modulated signal z2. The symbols of the weighted signal 1401A input by the serial-parallel conversion unit 1402A are numbered in order as # 1, # 2, # 3, # 4, .... At this time, as shown in FIG. 15A, symbols # 1, # 2, # 3, # 4, ... Are arranged in order from carrier 0, and symbols # 1 to # 9 are arranged at time $ 1. After that, symbols # 10 to # 19 are arranged regularly, such as at time $ 2.

Similarly, the symbols of the weighted signal 1401B input by the serial-parallel conversion unit 1402B are numbered in order as # 1, # 2, # 3, # 4, .... At this time, as shown in FIG. 15B, symbols # 1, # 2, # 3, # 4, ... Are arranged in order from carrier 0, and symbols # 1 to # 9 are arranged at time $ 1. After that, symbols # 10 to # 19 are arranged regularly, such as at time $ 2. The modulated signals z1 and z2 are complex signals.

The symbol group 1501 and the symbol group 1502 shown in FIG. 15 are symbols for one cycle when the precoding weight switching method shown in FIG. 6 is used, and the symbol # 0 is the precoding weight of slot 4i in FIG. It is a symbol when used, symbol # 1 is a symbol when the precoding weight of slot 4i + 1 of FIG. 6 is used, and symbol # 2 is a symbol when the precoding weight of slot 4i + 2 of FIG. 6 is used. Yes, symbol # 3 is a symbol when the precoding weight of slot 4i + 3 of FIG. 6 is used. Therefore, in symbol # x, when x mod 4 is 0, symbol # x is a symbol when the precoding weight of slot 4i in FIG. 6 is used, and when x mod 4 is 1, symbol # x is a diagram. It is a symbol when the precoding weight of slot 4i + 1 of 6 is used, and when x mod 4 is 2, the symbol # x is a symbol when the precoding weight of slot 4i + 2 of FIG. 6 is used, and x mod 4 When is 3, symbol # x is a symbol when the precoding weight of slot 4i + 3 in FIG. 6 is used.

As described above, when a multi-carrier transmission method such as the OFDM method is used, the symbols can be arranged in the frequency axis direction, unlike the case of single-carrier transmission. The arrangement of the symbols is not limited to the arrangement as shown in FIG. Another example will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17.

FIG. 16 shows an example of a symbol sorting method in the sorting units 1401A and 1401B of FIG. 14 on the horizontal axis frequency and the vertical axis time, which are different from those of FIG. 15, and FIG. 16 (A) shows the modulation signal z1. 16 (B) shows a method of rearranging the symbols of the modulated signal z2. 16 (A) and 16 (B) are different from FIG. 15 in that the method of rearranging the symbols of the modulated signal z1 and the method of rearranging the symbols of the modulated signal z2 are different. 0 to # 5 are placed on carriers 4 to 9, symbols # 6 to # 9 are placed on carriers 0 to 3, and then symbols # 10 to # 19 are placed on each carrier according to the same rules. At this time, as in FIG. 15, the symbol group 1 shown in FIG. 16
601 and the symbol group 1602 are symbols for one cycle when the precoding weight switching method shown in FIG. 6 is used.

FIG. 17 shows an example of a symbol rearrangement method in the rearrangement units 1401A and 1401B of FIG. 14 on the horizontal axis frequency and the vertical axis time, which are different from those of FIG. 15, and FIG. 17 (A) shows the modulation signal z1. A method of rearranging the symbols, FIG. 17B shows a method of rearranging the symbols of the modulated signal z2. The difference between FIGS. 17 (A) and 17 (B) is that the symbols are arranged in order on the carrier in FIG. 15, whereas the symbols are not arranged in order on the carrier in FIG. It is a point. As a matter of course, in FIG. 17, as in FIG. 16, the method of rearranging the symbols of the modulated signal z1 and the method of rearranging the modulated signal z2 may be different.

18 (A) shows an example of the symbol rearrangement method in the rearrangement part 1401A and 1401B of FIG. 14 in the horizontal axis frequency and the vertical axis time, which are different from those of FIGS. 18 and 15, and FIG. 18A shows a modulated signal. A method of rearranging the symbols of z1 and FIG. 18B show a method of rearranging the symbols of the modulated signal z2. In FIGS. 15 to 17, the symbols are arranged in the frequency axis direction, but in FIG. 18, the symbols are arranged using both the frequency and the time axis.

In FIG. 6, an example of switching the precoding weight in 4 slots has been described, but here, a case of switching in 8 slots will be described as an example. The symbol group 1801 and the symbol group 1802 shown in FIG. 18 are symbols for one cycle (hence, 8 symbols) when the precoding weight switching method is used, and symbol # 0 uses the precoding weight of slot 8i. Symbol # 1 is a symbol when the precoding weight of slot 8i + 1 is used, symbol # 2 is a symbol when the precoding weight of slot 8i + 2 is used, and symbol # 3 is a symbol of slot 8i + 3. Symbol # 4 is a symbol when the precoding weight of slot 8i + 4 is used, and symbol # 5 is a symbol when the precoding weight of slot 8i + 5 is used. , Symbol # 6 is a symbol when the precoding weight of slot 8i + 6 is used, and symbol # 7 is a symbol when the precoding weight of slot 8i + 7 is used. Therefore, in symbol # x, when x mod 8 is 0, symbol # x is a symbol when the precoding weight of slot 8i is used, and when x mod 8 is 1, symbol # x is a pre of slot 8i + 1. The symbol when the coding weight is used, when x mod 8 is 2, the symbol # x is the symbol when the precoding weight of slot 8i + 2 is used, and when x mod 8 is 3, the symbol # x is. It is a symbol when the precoding weight of slot 8i + 3 is used, when x mod 8 is 4, symbol # x is a symbol when the precoding weight of slot 8i + 4 is used, and when x mod 8 is 5. Symbol # x is a symbol when the precoding weight of slot 8i + 5 is used, x mod 8 is 6, symbol # x is a symbol when the precoding weight of slot 8i + 6 is used, and x mod 8 is. At 7, symbol # x is a symbol when the precoding weight of slot 8i + 7 is used. In the arrangement of the symbols in FIG. 18, symbols for one cycle are arranged using a total of 4 × 2 = 8 slots, 4 slots in the time axis direction and 2 slots in the frequency axis direction. At this time, one cycle is arranged. The number of minute symbols is m × n symbols (that is, there are m × n types of precoding weights). The frequency axis slot (number of carriers) used to place symbols for one cycle is n, time. Assuming that the slot used in the axial direction is m, it is preferable that m> n. This is because the phase of the direct wave, the fluctuation in the time axis direction is gentler than the fluctuation in the frequency axis direction. Therefore, since the precoding weight of the present embodiment is changed in order to reduce the influence of the steady direct wave, it is desired to reduce the fluctuation of the direct wave in the cycle of changing the precoding weight. Therefore, it is preferable to set m> n. In consideration of the above points, it is better to rearrange the symbols using both the frequency axis and the time axis as shown in FIG. 18 rather than rearranging the symbols only in the frequency axis direction or only in the time axis direction. Is likely to be stationary, and the effect of the present invention can be easily obtained. However, when arranging in the direction of the frequency axis, the fluctuation of the frequency axis is steep, so it may be possible to obtain diversity gain. It is not always the case.

FIG. 19 shows an example of a symbol sorting method in the sorting units 1401A and 1401B of FIG. 14 on the horizontal axis frequency and the vertical axis time, which are different from those in FIG. 18, and FIG. 19 (A) shows the modulation signal z1. 19 (B) shows a method of rearranging the symbols of the modulated signal z2. In FIG. 19, the symbols are arranged using both the frequency and the time axis as in FIG. 18, but the difference from FIG. 18 is that in FIG. 18, the frequency direction is prioritized and then in the time axis direction. Whereas the symbols are arranged, in FIG. 19, the time axis direction is prioritized, and then the symbols are arranged in the time axis direction. In FIG. 19, the symbol group 1901 and the symbol group 1902 are symbols for one cycle when the precoding switching method is used.

In addition, in FIGS. 18 and 19, similarly to FIG. 16, even if the symbol arrangement method of the modulation signal z1 and the symbol arrangement method of the modulation signal z2 are arranged differently, it can be carried out in the same manner, and it is expensive. The effect that reception quality can be obtained can be obtained. Further, in FIGS. 18 and 19, even if the symbols are not arranged in order as shown in FIG. 17, the same operation can be performed, and the effect that high reception quality can be obtained can be obtained. can.

FIG. 27 shows an example of a symbol rearrangement method in the rearrangement units 1401A and 140B of FIG. 14 on the horizontal axis frequency and the vertical axis time, which are different from the above. Consider a case where the precoding matrix is regularly switched using four slots such as those in equations (37) to (40). The characteristic point in FIG. 27 is that the symbols are arranged in order in the frequency axis direction, but when the symbols are advanced in the time axis direction, the symbols are cyclically shifted by n (n = 1 in the example of FIG. 27). Is. It is assumed that the precoding matrices of equations (37) to (40) are switched in the four symbols shown in the symbol group 2710 in the frequency axis direction in FIG. 27.

At this time, the symbol of # 0 is precoding using the precoding matrix of equation (37), # 1 is precoding using the precoding matrix of equation (38), and # 2 is the precoding matrix of equation (39). Precoding using, and in # 3, precoding using the precoding matrix of Eq. (40) shall be performed.

Similarly, for the symbol group 2720 in the frequency axis direction, the symbol of # 4 is precoded using the precoding matrix of equation (37), and the symbol of # 5 is precoded using the precoding matrix of equation (38), # 6. Then, precoding using the precoding matrix of Eq. (39) is performed, and in # 7, precoding using the precoding matrix of Eq. (40) is performed.

The precoding matrix was switched as described above for the symbol of time $ 1, but since it is cyclically shifted in the time axis direction, the symbols 2701, 2702, 2703, and 2704 are pre-coded as follows. The coding matrix will be switched.

In the symbol group 2701 in the time axis direction, the symbol # 0 is precoded using the precoding matrix of Eq. (37), # 9 is precoded using the precoding matrix of Eq. (38), and # 18 is precoded using the precoding matrix of Eq. (38). It is assumed that precoding using the precoding matrix of 39) is performed, and in # 27, precoding using the precoding matrix of equation (40) is performed.

In the symbol group 2702 in the time axis direction, the symbol of # 28 is precoded using the precoding matrix of Eq. (37), # 1 is precoded using the precoding matrix of Eq. (38), and # 10 is precoding using the precoding matrix of Eq. (38). It is assumed that precoding using the precoding matrix of 39) is performed, and in # 19, precoding using the precoding matrix of equation (40) is performed.

In the symbol group 2703 in the time axis direction, the symbol of # 20 is precoded using the precoding matrix of Eq. (37), # 29 is precoded using the precoding matrix of Eq. (38), and # 1 is precoding using the precoding matrix of Eq. (38). It is assumed that the precoding using the precoding matrix of 39) is performed, and in # 10, the precoding using the precoding matrix of the equation (40) is performed.

In the symbol group 2704 in the time axis direction, the symbol of # 12 is precoded using the precoding matrix of Eq. (37), # 21 is precoded using the precoding matrix of Eq. (38), and # 30 is precoding using the precoding matrix of Eq. (38). It is assumed that the precoding using the precoding matrix of 39) is performed, and in # 3, the precoding using the precoding matrix of the equation (40) is performed.

The feature in FIG. 27 is that, for example, when focusing on the symbol of # 11, the symbols (# 10 and # 12) on both sides in the frequency axis direction at the same time are both precoded using a precoding matrix different from that of # 11. The symbols (# 2 and # 20) on both sides of the same carrier in the time axis direction of the symbol # 11 are both precoded using a precoding matrix different from that of # 11. be. And this is not limited to the symbol of # 11, and all the symbols having symbols on both sides in the frequency axis direction and the time axis direction have the same characteristics as the symbol of # 11. As a result, the precoding matrix is effectively switched, and it is less likely to be affected by the constant condition of the direct wave, so that the data reception quality is likely to be improved.

In FIG. 27, the description has been made with n = 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the same can be performed with n = 3. Further, in FIG. 27, the above characteristics are realized by arranging the symbols on the frequency axis and cyclically shifting the order of the symbol arrangement when the time advances in the axial direction, but the symbols are randomized. There is also a method of realizing the above characteristics by arranging them (which may be regular).

(Embodiment 2)
In the first embodiment, the case where the precoding weights as shown in FIG. 6 are regularly switched has been described, but in the present embodiment, a specific precoding weight design method different from the precoding weights in FIG. 6 has been described. Will be described.

In FIG. 6, a method of switching the precoding weights of the equations (37) to (40) has been described. If this is generalized, the precoding weight can be changed as follows. (However, the switching cycle of the precoding weight is set to 4, and the same description as in equations (37) to (40) is given.)
When the symbol number is 4i (i is an integer of 0 or more):

However, j is an imaginary unit.
When the symbol number is 4i + 1:

When the symbol number is 4i + 2:

When the symbol number is 4i + 3:

Then, from the equation (36) and the equation (41), the reception vector can be expressed ^{as R (t) = (r1 (t), r2 (t)) T as follows.}
When the symbol number is 4i:

When the symbol number is 4i + 1:

When the symbol number is 4i + 2:

When the symbol number is 4i + 3:

At this time, _{it is assumed that only the direct wave component exists in the channel elements h 11} (t), h ₁₂ (t), h ₂₁ (t), and h ₂₂ (t), and the amplitude component of the direct wave component is It is assumed that they are all equal and that there is no fluctuation over time. Then, equations (46) to (49) can be expressed as follows.
When the symbol number is 4i:

When the symbol number is 4i + 1:

When the symbol number is 4i + 2:

When the symbol number is 4i + 3:

However, in equations (50) to (53), it is assumed that A is a positive real number and q is a complex number. The values of A and q are determined according to the positional relationship between the transmitting device and the receiving device. Then, equations (50) to (53) are expressed as follows.
When the symbol number is 4i:

When the symbol number is 4i + 1:

When the symbol number is 4i + 2:

When the symbol number is 4i + 3:

Then, when q is expressed as follows, since the signal component based on either s1 or s2 is not included in r1 and r2, the signal of either s1 or s2 cannot be obtained.
When the symbol number is 4i:

When the symbol number is 4i + 1:

When the symbol number is 4i + 2:

When the symbol number is 4i + 3:

At this time, if q has the same solution at symbol numbers 4i, 4i + 1, 4i + 2, and 4i + 3, the direct wave channel element does not fluctuate significantly, so that the reception has a channel element in which the value of q is equal to the above same solution. Since the device cannot obtain good reception quality at any symbol number, it is difficult to obtain an error correction capability even if an error correction code is introduced. Therefore, in order for q not to have the same solution, focusing on the solution that does not include δ among the two solutions of q, the following conditions are required from equations (58) to (61). Will be.

(X is 0,1,2,3, y is 0,1,2,3, and x ≠ y.)

As an example of satisfying condition # 1,
(Example # 1)
<1> Let θ11 (4i) = θ11 (4i + 1) = θ11 (4i + 2) = θ11 (4i + 3) = 0 radians.
<2> θ21 (4i) = 0 radians <3> θ21 (4i + 1) = π / 2 radians <4> θ21 (4i + 2) = π radians <5> θ21 (4i + 3) = 3π / 2 radians Be done. (The above is an example, and in the set of (θ21 (4i), θ21 (4i + 1), θ21 (4i + 2), θ21 (4i + 3)), 0 radian, π / 2 radian, π radian, and 3π / 2 radian are one. At this time, in particular, if the condition <1> is satisfied, it is not necessary to give signal processing (rotation processing) to the base band signal S1 (t), so that the circuit scale can be reduced. It has the advantage of being able to be planned. As another example
(Example # 2)
<6> θ11 (4i) = 0 radians <7> θ11 (4i + 1) = π / 2 radians <8> θ11 (4i + 2) = π radians <9> θ11 (4i + 3) = 3π / 2 radians.
<10> A method of setting θ21 (4i) = θ21 (4i + 1) = θ21 (4i + 2) = θ21 (4i + 3) = 0 radians is also conceivable. (The above is an example, and in the set of (θ11 (4i), θ11 (4i + 1), θ11 (4i + 2), θ11 (4i + 3)), 0 radian, π / 2 radian, π radian, and 3π / 2 radian are one. At this time, in particular, if the condition <6> is satisfied, it is not necessary to give signal processing (rotation processing) to the base band signal S2 (t), so that the circuit scale can be reduced. It has the advantage of being able to be planned. As yet another example, the following is given.
(Example # 3)
<11> Let θ11 (4i) = θ11 (4i + 1) = θ11 (4i + 2) = θ11 (4i + 3) = 0 radians.
<12> θ21 (4i) = 0 radians <13> θ21 (4i + 1) = π / 4 radians <14> θ21 (4i + 2) = π / 2 radians <15> θ21 (4i + 3) = 3π / 4 radians (the above is an example) In the set of (θ21 (4i), θ21 (4i + 1), θ21 (4i + 2), θ21 (4i + 3)), there are 0 radians, π / 4 radians, π / 2 radians, and 3π / 4 radians one by one. It only has to exist.)
(Example # 4)
<16> θ11 (4i) = 0 radians <17> θ11 (4i + 1) = π / 4 radians <18> θ11 (4i + 2) = π / 2 radians <19> θ11 (4i + 3) = 3π / 4 radians.
<20> θ21 (4i) = θ21 (4i + 1) = θ21 (4i + 2) = θ21 (4i + 3) = 0 radians (The above is an example, (θ11 (4i), θ11 (4i + 1), θ11 (4i + 2), θ11 ( There may be one 0 radian, one π / 4 radian, one π / 2 radian, and one 3π / 4 radian in the set of 4i + 3)).)
Although four examples have been given, the method of satisfying condition # 1 is not limited to this.

Next, not only θ11 and θ12 but also design requirements for λ and δ will be described. It suffices to set a certain value for λ, and it is necessary to give a requirement for δ as a requirement. Therefore, a method of setting δ when λ is set to 0 radians will be described.

In this case, if π / 2 radian ≦ | δ | ≦ π radian with respect to δ, good reception quality can be obtained especially in the LOS environment.
By the way, in the symbol numbers 4i, 4i + 1, 4i + 2, and 4i + 3, there are two points of q having poor reception quality. Therefore, there are 2 × 4 = 8 points. In order to prevent the reception quality from deteriorating in a specific receiving terminal in the LOS environment, it is preferable that all eight points are different solutions. In this case, the condition of <condition # 2> is required in addition to <condition # 1>.

In addition, it is preferable that the phases of these eight points exist uniformly. (Since the phase of the direct wave is likely to be uniformly distributed), the setting method of δ that satisfies this requirement will be described below.

In the case of (Example # 1) and (Example # 2), by setting δ to ± 3π / 4 radians, the poor reception quality is uniformly present in phase. For example, if (Example # 1) is set and δ is 3π / 4 radians, there is a point that the reception quality deteriorates once every four slots as shown in FIG. 20 (A is a positive real number). In the case of (Example # 3) and (Example # 4), by setting δ to ± π radians, the poor reception quality is uniformly present in phase. For example, if (Example # 3) is set and δ is π radian, as shown in FIG. 21, there is a point that the reception quality deteriorates once every four slots. (If the element q in the channel matrix H exists at the points shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the reception quality deteriorates.)
By doing the above, good reception quality can be obtained in the LOS environment. In the above, the example of changing the precoding weight in the 4-slot cycle has been described, but in the following, the case of changing the precoding weight in the N-slot cycle will be described. Considering the same as that of the first embodiment and the above description, the processing as shown below is performed after the symbol number.
When the symbol number Ni (i is an integer greater than or equal to 0):

However, j is an imaginary unit.
When the symbol number is Ni + 1:

・
・
・
When the symbol number Ni + k (k = 0, 1, ..., N-1):

・
・
・
When the symbol number is Ni + N-1:

Therefore, r1 and r2 are represented as follows.
When the symbol number Ni (i is an integer greater than or equal to 0):

However, j is an imaginary unit.
When the symbol number is Ni + 1:

・
・
・
When the symbol number Ni + k (k = 0, 1, ..., N-1):

・
・
・
When the symbol number is Ni + N-1:

At this time, _{it is assumed that only the direct wave component exists in the channel elements h 11} (t), h ₁₂ (t), h ₂₁ (t), and h ₂₂ (t), and the amplitude component of the direct wave component is It is assumed that they are all equal and that there is no fluctuation over time. Then, equations (66) to (69) can be expressed as follows.
When the symbol number Ni (i is an integer greater than or equal to 0):

However, j is an imaginary unit.
When the symbol number is Ni + 1:

・
・
・
When the symbol number Ni + k (k = 0, 1, ..., N-1):

・
・
・
When the symbol number is Ni + N-1:

However, in equations (70) to (73), it is assumed that A is a real number and q is a complex number. The values of A and q are determined according to the positional relationship between the transmitting device and the receiving device. Then, equations (70) to (73) are expressed as follows.
When the symbol number Ni (i is an integer greater than or equal to 0):

However, j is an imaginary unit.
When the symbol number is Ni + 1:

・
・
・
When the symbol number Ni + k (k = 0, 1, ..., N-1):

・
・
・
When the symbol number is Ni + N-1:

Then, when q is expressed as follows, since the signal component based on either s1 or s2 is not included in r1 and r2, the signal of either s1 or s2 cannot be obtained.
When the symbol number Ni (i is an integer greater than or equal to 0):

When the symbol number is Ni + 1:

・
・
・
When the symbol number Ni + k (k = 0, 1, ..., N-1):

・
・
・
When the symbol number is Ni + N-1:

At this time, if q has the same solution in the symbol numbers N to Ni + N-1, the channel element of the direct wave does not fluctuate significantly. Even with numbers, it is not possible to obtain good reception quality, so it is difficult to obtain error correction capability even if an error correction code is introduced. Therefore, in order for q not to have the same solution, focusing on the solution that does not include δ among the two solutions of q, the following conditions are required from equations (78) to (81). Will be.

(X is 0,1,2, ..., N-2, N-1, y is 0,1,2, ..., N-2, N-1, and x ≠ y. .)

Next, not only θ11 and θ12 but also design requirements for λ and δ will be described. It suffices to set a certain value for λ, and it is necessary to give a requirement for δ as a requirement. Therefore, a method of setting δ when λ is set to 0 radians will be described.

In this case, as in the case of the method of changing the precoding weight in a 4-slot cycle, if π / 2 radians ≤ | δ | ≤ π radians for δ, good reception quality is obtained especially in the LOS environment. Obtainable.

In the symbol numbers Ni to Ni + N-1, there are two points of q having poor reception quality, respectively, and therefore there are points of 2N points. In order to obtain good characteristics in the LOS environment, it is preferable that these 2N points are all different solutions. In this case, the condition of <condition # 4> is required in addition to <condition # 3>.

In addition, it is preferable that the phases of these 2N points exist uniformly. (Because the phase of the direct wave in each receiving device is likely to be uniformly distributed)
As described above, when the transmitting device of the MIMO transmission system transmits a plurality of modulated signals from a plurality of antennas, the precoding weight is switched over time and the switching is performed regularly, so that the LOS environment in which the direct wave is dominant is dominated. In the above, the effect of improving the transmission quality can be obtained as compared with the case of using the conventional spatial multiplex MIMO transmission.

In the present embodiment, the configuration of the receiving device is as described in the first embodiment. In particular, regarding the configuration of the receiving device, the operation is described by limiting the number of antennas, but the number of antennas increases. Can be carried out in the same manner. That is, the number of antennas in the receiving device does not affect the operation and effect of the present embodiment. Further, in the present embodiment, the error correction code is not limited as in the first embodiment.

Further, in the present embodiment, the method of changing the precoding weight on the time axis has been described in comparison with the first embodiment, but as described in the first embodiment, the frequency axis and frequency are used by using the multi-carrier transmission method. -By arranging symbols on the time axis, it can be implemented in the same way by changing the precoding weight. Further, in the present embodiment, symbols other than the data symbols, for example, pilot symbols (preambles, unique words, etc.), symbols for control information, and the like may be arranged in the frame in any manner.

(Embodiment 3)
In the first and second embodiments, the case where the amplitudes of the elements of the matrix of the precoding weights are equal in the method of regularly switching the precoding weights has been described, but in the present embodiment, this condition is satisfied. An example that does not exist will be described.
In order to compare with the second embodiment, a case where the precoding weight is changed in the N slot cycle will be described. Considering in the same manner as in the first and second embodiments, the symbol number is processed as shown below. However, β is a positive real number, and β ≠ 1.
When the symbol number Ni (i is an integer greater than or equal to 0):

However, j is an imaginary unit.
When the symbol number is Ni + 1:

・
・
・
When the symbol number Ni + k (k = 0, 1, ..., N-1):

・
・
・
When the symbol number is Ni + N-1:

Therefore, r1 and r2 are represented as follows.
When the symbol number Ni (i is an integer greater than or equal to 0):

However, j is an imaginary unit.
When the symbol number is Ni + 1:

・
・
・
When the symbol number Ni + k (k = 0, 1, ..., N-1):

・
・
・
When the symbol number is Ni + N-1:

At this time, _{it is assumed that only the direct wave component exists in the channel elements h 11} (t), h ₁₂ (t), h ₂₁ (t), and h ₂₂ (t), and the amplitude component of the direct wave component is It is assumed that they are all equal and that there is no fluctuation over time. Then, equations (86) to (89) can be expressed as follows.
When the symbol number Ni (i is an integer greater than or equal to 0):

However, j is an imaginary unit.
When the symbol number is Ni + 1:

・
・
・
When the symbol number Ni + k (k = 0, 1, ..., N-1):

・
・
・
When the symbol number is Ni + N-1:

However, in equations (90) to (93), it is assumed that A is a real number and q is a complex number. Then, equations (90) to (93) are expressed as follows.
When the symbol number Ni (i is an integer greater than or equal to 0):

However, j is an imaginary unit.
When the symbol number is Ni + 1:

・
・
・
When the symbol number Ni + k (k = 0, 1, ..., N-1):

・
・
・
When the symbol number is Ni + N-1:

Then, when q is expressed as follows, either the signal of s1 or s2 cannot be obtained.
When the symbol number Ni (i is an integer greater than or equal to 0):

When the symbol number is Ni + 1:

・
・
・
When the symbol number Ni + k (k = 0, 1, ..., N-1):

・
・
・
When the symbol number is Ni + N-1:

At this time, if q has the same solution in the symbol numbers N to Ni + N-1, the channel element of the direct wave does not fluctuate significantly, so that good reception quality cannot be obtained in any of the symbol numbers. Therefore, even if an error correction code is introduced, it is difficult to obtain an error correction capability. Therefore, in order for q not to have the same solution, focusing on the solution that does not include δ among the two solutions of q, the following conditions are required from equations (98) to (101). Will be.

(X is 0,1,2, ..., N-2, N-1, y is 0,1,2, ..., N-2, N-1, and x ≠ y. .)

Next, not only θ11 and θ12 but also design requirements for λ and δ will be described. It suffices to set a certain value for λ, and it is necessary to give a requirement for δ as a requirement. Therefore, a method of setting δ when λ is set to 0 radians will be described.

In this case, as in the case of the method of changing the precoding weight in a 4-slot cycle, if π / 2 radians ≤ | δ | ≤ π radians for δ, good reception quality is obtained especially in the LOS environment. Obtainable.

In the symbol numbers Ni to Ni + N-1, there are two points of q having poor reception quality, respectively, and therefore there are points of 2N points. In order to obtain good characteristics in the LOS environment, it is preferable that these 2N points are all different solutions. In this case, in addition to <condition # 5>, β is a positive real number, and considering that β ≠ 1, the condition of <condition # 6> is required.

As described above, when the transmitting device of the MIMO transmission system transmits a plurality of modulated signals from a plurality of antennas, the precoding weight is switched over time and the switching is performed regularly, so that the LOS environment in which the direct wave is dominant is dominated. In the above, the effect of improving the transmission quality can be obtained as compared with the case of using the conventional spatial multiplex MIMO transmission.

In the present embodiment, the configuration of the receiving device is as described in the first embodiment. In particular, regarding the configuration of the receiving device, the operation is described by limiting the number of antennas, but the number of antennas increases. Can be carried out in the same manner. That is, the number of antennas in the receiving device does not affect the operation and effect of the present embodiment. Further, in the present embodiment, the error correction code is not limited as in the first embodiment.

Further, in the present embodiment, the method of changing the precoding weight on the time axis has been described in comparison with the first embodiment, but as described in the first embodiment, the frequency axis and frequency are used by using the multi-carrier transmission method. -By arranging symbols on the time axis, it can be implemented in the same way by changing the precoding weight. Further, in the present embodiment, symbols other than the data symbols, for example, pilot symbols (preambles, unique words, etc.), symbols for control information, and the like may be arranged in the frame in any manner.

(Embodiment 4)
In the third embodiment, in the method of regularly switching the precoding weight, the case where the amplitude of each element of the matrix of the precoding weight is set to 1 and β is described as an example.

In addition, here,

Is ignoring.

Next, an example in which the β value is switched by the slot will be described.
In order to compare with the third embodiment, a case where the precoding weight is changed in a 2 × N slot cycle will be described.

Considering in the same manner as in the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the third embodiment, the symbol number is processed as shown below. However, β is a positive real number, and β ≠ 1. Also, α is a positive real number, and α ≠ β.
When the symbol number is 2Ni (i is an integer of 0 or more):

However, j is an imaginary unit.
When the symbol number is 2Ni + 1:

・
・
・
When the symbol number is 2Ni + k (k = 0, 1, ..., N-1):

・
・
・
When the symbol number is 2Ni + N-1:

When the symbol number is 2Ni + N (i is an integer of 0 or more):

However, j is an imaginary unit.
When the symbol number is 2Ni + N + 1:

・
・
・
When the symbol number is 2Ni + N + k (k = 0, 1, ..., N-1):

・
・
・
When the symbol number is 2Ni + 2N-1:

Therefore, r1 and r2 are represented as follows.
When the symbol number is 2Ni (i is an integer of 0 or more):

However, j is an imaginary unit.
When the symbol number is 2Ni + 1:

・
・
・
When the symbol number is 2Ni + k (k = 0, 1, ..., N-1):

・
・
・
When the symbol number is 2Ni + N-1:

When the symbol number is 2Ni + N (i is an integer of 0 or more):

However, j is an imaginary unit.
When the symbol number is 2Ni + N + 1:

・
・
・
When the symbol number is 2Ni + N + k (k = 0, 1, ..., N-1):

・
・
・
When the symbol number is 2Ni + 2N-1:

At this time, _{it is assumed that only the direct wave component exists in the channel elements h 11} (t), h ₁₂ (t), h ₂₁ (t), and h ₂₂ (t), and the amplitude component of the direct wave component is It is assumed that they are all equal and that there is no fluctuation over time. Then, equations (110) to (117) can be expressed as follows.
When the symbol number is 2Ni (i is an integer of 0 or more):

However, j is an imaginary unit.
When the symbol number is 2Ni + 1:

・
・
・
When the symbol number is 2Ni + k (k = 0, 1, ..., N-1):

・
・
・
When the symbol number is 2Ni + N-1:

When the symbol number is 2Ni + N (i is an integer of 0 or more):

However, j is an imaginary unit.
When the symbol number is 2Ni + N + 1:

・
・
・
When the symbol number is 2Ni + N + k (k = 0, 1, ..., N-1):

・
・
・
When the symbol number is 2Ni + 2N-1:

However, in equations (118) to (125), it is assumed that A is a real number and q is a complex number. Then, equations (118) to (125) are expressed as follows.
When the symbol number is 2Ni (i is an integer of 0 or more):

However, j is an imaginary unit.
When the symbol number is 2Ni + 1:

・
・
・
When the symbol number is 2Ni + k (k = 0, 1, ..., N-1):

・
・
・
When the symbol number is 2Ni + N-1:

When the symbol number is 2Ni + N (i is an integer of 0 or more):

However, j is an imaginary unit.
When the symbol number is 2Ni + N + 1:

・
・
・
When the symbol number is 2Ni + N + k (k = 0, 1, ..., N-1):

・
・
・
When the symbol number is 2Ni + 2N-1:

Then, when q is expressed as follows, either the signal of s1 or s2 cannot be obtained.
When the symbol number is 2Ni (i is an integer of 0 or more):

When the symbol number is 2Ni + 1:

・
・
・
When the symbol number is 2Ni + k (k = 0, 1, ..., N-1):

・
・
・
When the symbol number is 2Ni + N-1:

When the symbol number is 2Ni + N (i is an integer of 0 or more):

When the symbol number is 2Ni + N + 1:

・
・
・
When the symbol number is 2Ni + N + k (k = 0, 1, ..., N-1):

・
・
・
When the symbol number is 2Ni + 2N-1:

At this time, if q has the same solution in the symbol numbers 2N to 2Ni + N-1, the channel element of the direct wave does not fluctuate significantly, so that good reception quality cannot be obtained at any symbol number. Therefore, even if an error correction code is introduced, it is difficult to obtain an error correction capability. Therefore, in order for q not to have the same solution, δ of the two solutions of q
Focusing on the solution that does not include, <condition # 7> or <condition # 8> is required from equations (134) to (141) and α ≠ β.

At this time, <condition # 8> is the same as the condition described in the first to third embodiments, but <condition # 7> is q 2 because α ≠ β. Of the two solutions, the one that does not contain δ will have a different solution.

Next, not only θ11 and θ12 but also design requirements for λ and δ will be described. It suffices to set a certain value for λ, and it is necessary to give a requirement for δ as a requirement. Therefore, a method of setting δ when λ is set to 0 radians will be described.

In this case, as in the case of the method of changing the precoding weight in a 4-slot cycle, if π / 2 radians ≤ | δ | ≤ π radians for δ, good reception quality is obtained especially in the LOS environment. Obtainable.

In the symbol numbers 2Ni to 2Ni + 2N-1, there are two points of q having poor reception quality, and therefore there are points of 4N points. In order to obtain good characteristics in the LOS environment, it is preferable that these 4N points are all different solutions. At this time, focusing on the amplitude, α ≠ β for <condition # 7> or <condition # 8>, so the following conditions are required.

As described above, when the transmitting device of the MIMO transmission system transmits a plurality of modulated signals from a plurality of antennas, the precoding weight is switched over time and the switching is performed regularly, so that the LOS environment in which the direct wave is dominant is dominated. In the above, the effect of improving the transmission quality can be obtained as compared with the case of using the conventional spatial multiplex MIMO transmission.

In the present embodiment, the configuration of the receiving device is as described in the first embodiment. In particular, regarding the configuration of the receiving device, the operation is described by limiting the number of antennas, but the number of antennas increases. Can be carried out in the same manner. That is, the number of antennas in the receiving device does not affect the operation and effect of the present embodiment. Further, in the present embodiment, the error correction code is not limited as in the first embodiment.

Further, in the present embodiment, the method of changing the precoding weight on the time axis has been described in comparison with the first embodiment, but as described in the first embodiment, the frequency axis and frequency are used by using the multi-carrier transmission method. -By arranging symbols on the time axis, it can be implemented in the same way even if the precoding weight is changed. Further, in the present embodiment, symbols other than the data symbols, for example, pilot symbols (preambles, unique words, etc.), symbols for control information, and the like may be arranged in the frame in any manner.

(Embodiment 5)
In the first to fourth embodiments, a method of regularly switching the precoding weight has been described, but in the present embodiment, a modified example thereof will be described.

In the first to fourth embodiments, a method of regularly switching the precoding weights as shown in FIG. 6 has been described. In the present embodiment, a method of regularly switching the precoding weights, which is different from that of FIG. 6, will be described.

Similar to FIG. 6, FIG. 22 shows a diagram relating to a switching method different from that of FIG. 6 in a method of switching four different precoding weights (matrix). In FIG. 22, four different precoding weights (matrix) are represented as W ₁ , W ₂ , W ₃ , and W ₄ . (For example, W ₁ is the precoding weight (matrix) in the equation (37), W ₂ is the precoding weight (matrix) in the equation (38), W ₃ is the precoding weight (matrix) in the equation (39), W ₄ Is a precoding weight (matrix) in the equation (40).) And those having the same operation as those in FIGS. 3 and 6 are designated by the same reference numerals. In FIG. 22, the unique part is
The first cycle 2201, the second cycle 2202, the third cycle 2203, ... Are all composed of four slots.
-For 4 slots, a different precoding weight matrix for each slot, that is, W ₁ , W ₂ , W ₃ , and W ₄ is used once.
-In the first cycle 2201, the second cycle 2202, the third cycle 2203, ..., _{The order of W 1} , W ₂ , W ₃ , and W ₄ does not necessarily have to be the same.

Is. In order to realize this, the precoding weight matrix generation unit 2200 takes a signal regarding the weighting method as an input, and outputs information 2210 regarding the precoding weight according to the order in each cycle. Then, the weighting synthesis unit 600 takes this signal and s1 (t) and s2 (t) as inputs, performs weighting synthesis, and outputs z1 (t) and z2 (t).

FIG. 23 shows a weighted synthesis method with respect to FIG. 22 as opposed to the above-mentioned precoding method. In FIG. 23, the difference in FIG. 22 is that the same method as in FIG. 22 is realized by arranging the rearrangement unit after the weighting synthesis unit and rearranging the signals.

In FIG. 23, the precoding weight generation unit 2200 receives information 315 regarding the weighting method as input, and the precoding weights W ₁ , W ₂ , W ₃ , W _4, W ₁ , W ₂ , W ₃ , W _4, ... Precoding weight information 2210 is output in the order of. Therefore, the weighting / combining unit 600 uses the precoding weights W ₁ , W ₂ , W ₃ , W _4, W ₁ , W ₂ , W ₃ , W _4, ... In this order, and after precoding, The signals 2300A and 2300B are output.

The sorting unit 2300 receives the precoded signals 2300A and 2300B as inputs, and the precoded signals are in the order of the first cycle 2201, the second cycle 2202, and the third cycle 2203 in FIG. 23. Sorting is performed for 2300A and 2300B, and z1 (t) and z2 (t) are output.

In the above description, the switching cycle of the precoding weight has been described as 4 in order to compare it with FIG. 6, but it can be similarly carried out at times other than the cycle 4 as in the first to fourth embodiments. It is possible.

Further, in the first to fourth embodiments and the above-mentioned precoding method, it has been described that the values of δ and β are the same for each slot in the cycle, but the values of δ and β for each slot. May be switched.

As described above, when the transmitting device of the MIMO transmission system transmits a plurality of modulated signals from a plurality of antennas, the precoding weight is switched over time and the switching is performed regularly, so that the LOS environment in which the direct wave is dominant is dominated. In the above, the effect of improving the transmission quality can be obtained as compared with the case of using the conventional spatial multiplex MIMO transmission.

In the present embodiment, the configuration of the receiving device is as described in the first embodiment. In particular, regarding the configuration of the receiving device, the operation is described by limiting the number of antennas, but the number of antennas increases. Can be carried out in the same manner. That is, the number of antennas in the receiving device does not affect the operation and effect of the present embodiment. Further, in the present embodiment, the error correction code is not limited as in the first embodiment.

Further, in the present embodiment, the method of changing the precoding weight on the time axis has been described in comparison with the first embodiment, but as described in the first embodiment, the frequency axis and frequency are used by using the multi-carrier transmission method. -By arranging symbols on the time axis, it can be implemented in the same way by changing the precoding weight. Further, in the present embodiment, symbols other than the data symbols, for example, pilot symbols (preambles, unique words, etc.), symbols for control information, and the like may be arranged in the frame in any manner.

(Embodiment 6)
Although the method of regularly switching the precoding weights has been described in the first to fourth embodiments, in the present embodiment, the precoding weights are regularly changed again including the contents described in the first to fourth embodiments. The method of switching will be described.

Here, first, a method of designing a precoding matrix of a spatial multiplexing 2x2 MIMO system in which precoding without feedback from a communication partner is applied in consideration of the LOS environment will be described.

FIG. 30 shows a spatially multiplexed 2x2 MIMO system model to which precoding is applied in which there is no feedback from the communication partner. The information vector z is coded and interleaved. Then, as the interleaved output, the vector of the encoded bits u (p) = (u ₁ (p), u ₂ (p)) is obtained (p is the slot time). However, u _i (p) = (u _i1 (p)…, u _ih (p)) (h: number of transmission bits per symbol). If the signal after modulation (after mapping) is s (p) = (s ₁ (p), s ₂ (p)) ^T, and if the precoding matrix is F (p), the signal after precoding x (p) = (x ₁ (p), x ₂ (p)) ^T is expressed by the following equation.

Therefore, if the received vector is y (p) = (y ₁ (p), y ₂ (p)) ^T , it is expressed by the following equation.

At this time, H (p) is the channel matrix, n (p) = (n ₁ (p), n ₂ (p)) ^T is the noise vector, n _i (p) is the mean value 0, and the variance σ ² iid complex Gaussian noise. Then, when the rice factor is K, the above equation can be expressed as follows.

At this time, H _d (p) is the channel matrix of the direct wave component, and H _s (p) is the channel matrix of the scattered wave component. Therefore, the channel matrix H (p) is expressed as follows.

In equation (145), it is assumed that the direct wave environment is uniquely determined by the positional relationship between the communication devices, and the channel matrix H _d (p) of the direct wave component does not fluctuate in time. In addition, the channel matrix H _d (p) of the direct wave component is a regular matrix of the channel matrix of the direct wave component because there is a high possibility that the distance between the transceivers will be sufficiently longer than the distance between the transmitting antennas. And. Therefore, the channel matrix H _d (p) is expressed as follows.

Here, it is assumed that A is a positive real number and q is a complex number. The following describes how to design the precoding matrix of the spatial multiplexing 2x2 MIMO system that applies precoding that does not have feedback from the communication partner in consideration of the LOS environment.

From Eqs. (144) and (145), it is difficult to analyze the state including the scattered wave, so that it is difficult to obtain a precoding matrix without appropriate feedback in the state containing the scattered wave. In addition, the NLOS environment has less deterioration in data reception quality than the LOS environment. Therefore, a method for designing a precoding matrix without appropriate feedback in an LOS environment (a precoding matrix for a precoding method that switches the precoding matrix over time) will be described.

As described above, from the equations (144) and (145), it is difficult to analyze the state including the scattered wave. Therefore, it is necessary to obtain an appropriate precoding matrix in the channel matrix containing only the direct wave component. To. Therefore, in Eq. (144), consider the case where the channel matrix contains only direct wave components. Therefore, it can be expressed as follows from the equation (146).

Here, it is assumed that a unitary matrix is used as the precoding matrix. Therefore, the precoding matrix is expressed as follows.

At this time, λ is a fixed value. Therefore, equation (147) can be expressed as follows.

As can be seen from equation (149), when the receiver performs a linear operation of ZF (zero forcing) or MMSE (minimum mean squared error), _{the bits transmitted by s 1} (p) and s ₂ (p) are determined. You can't. For this reason, the iterative APP (or iterative Max-log APP) or APP (or Max-log APP) as described in the first embodiment is performed (hereinafter referred to as ML (Maximum Likelihood) operation), and s. _{The log-likelihood ratio of each bit transmitted in 1} (p) and s ₂ (p) is obtained, and the error correction code is decoded. Therefore, a method of designing a precoding matrix without appropriate feedback in the LOS environment for a receiver performing ML operation will be described.

Consider the precoding in equation (149). Multiply the right and left sides of the first line by e ^-jΨ , and similarly multiply the right and left sides of the second line by e ^-jΨ . Then, it is expressed as the following equation.

Redefine e ^{-j Ψ} y ₁ (p), e ^{-j Ψ} y ₂ (p), e ^{-j Ψ} q as y ₁ (p), y ₂ (p), q ^{, respectively, and e -j Ψ} n (p). ) = (e ^{-j Ψ} n ₁ (p), e ^{-j Ψ} n ₂ (p)) ^T , and e ^{-j Ψ} n ₁ (p), e ^{-j Ψ} n ₂ (p) have an average value of 0 and a variance of σ ² . iid (independent identically distributed) Since it becomes complex Gaussian noise, ^{redefine e -j Ψ} n (p) as n (p). Then, even if the equation (150) is changed to the equation (151), the generality is not lost.

Next, the equation (151) is transformed into the equation (152) so as to be easy to understand.

At this time, when the minimum value of the Euclidean distance between the reception signal point and the reception candidate signal point is d _min ² , it is a _{bad point that d min} ² takes the minimum value of zero, and it is _{transmitted at s 1} (p). There are two qs that are in a bad state where all the bits or all the bits _{transmitted by s 2 (p) are lost.}

In equation (152), s ₁ (p) does not exist:

In equation (152), s ₂ (p) does not exist:

(Hereafter, q that satisfies equations (153) and (154) is "reception inferior points of _{s 1} and s _{2, respectively."}
Call)
When equation (153) is satisfied, since all the bits transmitted by _{s 1} (p) are lost, the received log-likelihood ratio of all the bits transmitted by _{s 1 (p) cannot be obtained, and equation (154) is satisfied.} ), Since all the bits transmitted by _{s 2} (p) are lost, the received log-likelihood ratio of all the bits transmitted by _{s 2 (p) cannot be obtained.}

Here, consider a broadcasting / multicast communication system in which the precoding matrix is not switched. At this time, consider a system model in which there is a base station that transmits a modulated signal using a precoding method that does not switch the precoding matrix, and there are a plurality of terminals (Γ) that receive the modulated signal transmitted by the base station.

The condition of the direct wave between the base station and the terminal is considered to change little with time. Then, from the equations (153) and (154), the terminal in the LOS environment in which the condition of the equation (155) or the equation (156) is satisfied and the rice factor is large is said to deteriorate the data reception quality. There is a possibility of falling into a phenomenon. Therefore, in order to improve this problem, it is necessary to switch the precoding matrix in time.

Therefore, consider a method (hereinafter referred to as a precoding hopping method) in which the time period is set to N slots and the precoding matrix is regularly switched.
For the time period N slot, N kinds of precoding matrices F [i] based on the equation (148) are prepared (i = 0,1, ..., N-1). At this time, the precoding matrix F [i] is expressed as follows.

Here, α is assumed to be unchanged with time, and λ is also assumed to be unchanged with time (may be changed).
Then, as in the first embodiment, the signal after precoding in the equation (142) of the time point (time) N × k + i (k is an integer of 0 or more, i = 0,1, ..., N-1). The precoding matrix used to obtain x (p = N × k + i) is F [i]. The same applies to the following.

At this time, based on the equations (153) and (154), the following precoding matrix design conditions for precoding hopping are important.

According to <Condition # 10>, in all Γ terminals, the number of slots that take the reception poor point of _{s 1 at N in the time cycle is 1 slot or less.} Therefore, the log-likelihood ratio of the bits transmitted in _{s 1} (p) over the N-1 slot can be obtained. Similarly, according to <Condition # 11>, in all Γ terminals, the number of slots that take the reception poor point of _{s 2 at N in the time cycle is 1 slot or less.} Therefore, the log-likelihood ratio of the bits transmitted in _{s 2} (p) over the N-1 slot can be obtained.

In this way, by giving the design norms of the precoding matrix of <condition # 10> and <condition # 11>, the number of bits from which the log-like likelihood ratio of the bits transmitted in _{s 1 (p) can be obtained, and s By} guaranteeing the number of bits from which the logarithmic likelihood ratio of the bits transmitted in 2 (p) can be obtained to a certain number or more in all Γ terminals, data in an LOS environment with a large rice factor in all Γ terminals Consider improving the deterioration of reception quality.

The following describes an example of the precoding matrix in the precoding hopping method.
The probability density distribution of the phase of the direct wave can be considered to be a uniform distribution of [0 2π]. Therefore, it can be considered that the probability density distribution of the phase of q in Eqs. (151) and (152) is also a uniform distribution of [0 2π]. Therefore, in the same LOS environment where only the phase of q is different, the following are given as conditions for giving as fair data reception quality as possible to Γ terminals.
<Condition # 12>
When the precoding hopping method of the time cycle N slot is used, _{the reception poor points of s 1} are arranged so as to be uniformly distributed with respect to the phase at N in the time cycle, and the reception poor points of _{s 2 are set.} Arrange so that the distribution is uniform with respect to the phase.

Therefore, an example of the precoding matrix in the precoding hopping method based on <condition # 10> to <condition # 12> will be described. Let α = 1.0 of the precoding matrix of equation (157).
(Example # 5)
In order to set the time period N = 8 and satisfy <condition # 10> to <condition # 12>, a precoding matrix in the precoding hopping method having a time period N = 8 as shown in the following equation is given.

However, j is an imaginary unit, and i = 0,1, ..., 7. Equation (161) may be given instead of equation (160) (λ, θ ₁₁ [i] shall not change with time (may change).
).

Therefore, the _{poor reception points of s 1} and s ₂ are as shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (b). (In FIG. 31, the horizontal axis is the real axis and the vertical axis is the imaginary axis.) Further, the equations (162) and (163) may be given instead of the equations (160) and (161) (i). = 0,1, ..., 7) (λ, θ ₁₁ [i] shall not change over time (may change)).

Next, in the same LOS environment different from the condition 12 in which only the phase of q is different, the following are given as conditions for giving the reception quality of data as fair as possible to the Γ terminals. <Condition # 13>
When using the precoding hopping method of the time cycle N slot,

In addition, the reception inferior points of _{s 1} are arranged so as to have a uniform distribution with _{respect to the phase and the reception inferior points of s 2} with respect to the phase at N in the time period.
Therefore, an example of the precoding matrix in the precoding hopping method based on <condition # 10>, <condition # 11>, and <condition # 13> will be described. Let α = 1.0 of the precoding matrix of equation (157).
(Example # 6)
Let the time period N = 4, and give the precoding matrix in the precoding hopping method with the time period N = 4 as shown in the following equation.

However, j is an imaginary unit, and i = 0,1,2,3. Equation (166) instead of Equation (165)
) May be given (λ, θ ₁₁ [i] shall not change with time (may change).
).

Therefore, the _{poor reception points of s 1} and s ₂ are as shown in FIG. (In FIG. 32, the horizontal axis is the real axis and the vertical axis is the imaginary axis.) Further, the equations (167) and (168) may be given instead of the equations (165) and (166) (i). = 0,1,2,3) (λ, θ ₁₁ [i] shall not change over time (may change)).

Next, a precoding hopping method using a non-unitary matrix will be described.
Based on Eq. (148), the precoding matrix used in this study is expressed as follows.

Then, the equations corresponding to the equations (151) and (152) are expressed as the following equations.

At this time, there are two qs in which _{the minimum value d min} ² of the Euclidean distance between the received signal point and the received candidate signal point is zero.
In equation (171), s ₁ (p) does not exist:

In equation (171), s ₂ (p) does not exist:

In the precoding hopping method of the time period N, N kinds of precoding matrices F [i] are expressed as follows with reference to the equation (169).

Here, it is assumed that α and δ do not change with time. At this time, based on Eqs. (34) and (35), the following precoding matrix design conditions for precoding hopping are given.

(Example # 7)
Let α = 1.0 of the precoding matrix of equation (174). Then, set the time period N = 16
In order to satisfy <Condition # 12>, <Condition # 14>, and <Condition # 15>, a precoding matrix in the precoding hopping method having a time period N = 8 as shown in the following equation is given.

When i = 0,1,…,7:

When i = 8,9,…,15:

Further, it can be given as a precoding matrix different from the equations (177) and (178) as follows.
When i = 0,1,…,7:

When i = 8,9,…,15:

Therefore, the _{poor reception points of s 1} and s ₂ are as shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (b).
(In FIG. 33, the horizontal axis is the real axis and the vertical axis is the imaginary axis.) Also, instead of the equations (177), (178) and (179), and (180), the precoding is as follows. You may give a matrix.

When i = 0,1,…,7:

When i = 8,9,…,15:

or,
When i = 0,1,…,7:

When i = 8,9,…,15:

(Also, in equations (177) to (184), 7π / 8 may be changed to -7π / 8).
Next, in the same LOS environment in which only the phase of q is different, which is different from <Condition # 12>, the following are given as conditions for giving as fair data reception quality as possible to Γ terminals. ..
<Condition # 16>
When using the precoding hopping method of the time cycle N slot,

In addition, the reception inferior points of _{s 1} are arranged so as to have a uniform distribution with _{respect to the phase and the reception inferior points of s 2} with respect to the phase at N in the time period.
Therefore, an example of the precoding matrix in the precoding hopping method based on <condition # 14>, <condition # 15>, and <condition # 16> will be described. Let α = 1.0 of the precoding matrix of equation (174).
(Example # 8)
Let the time period N = 8, and give the precoding matrix in the precoding hopping method with the time period N = 8 as shown in the following equation.

However, i = 0,1, ..., 7.
Further, as a precoding matrix different from Eq. (186), it can be given as follows (i = 0,1, ..., 7) (λ, θ ₁₁ [i] does not change with time (1). May change).).

Therefore, the _{poor reception points of s 1} and s ₂ are as shown in FIG. 34. Further, instead of Eqs. (186) and (187), a precoding matrix may be given as follows (i = 0,1, ..., 7) (λ, θ ₁₁ [i] changes with time. Not (may change).

or,

(Also, in equations (186) to (189), 7π / 8 may be changed to -7π / 8.)
Next, in the precoding matrix of Eq. (174), α ≠ 1, and the precoding hopping method different from that of (Example # 7) and (Example # 8) in which the point of the distance between the reception poor points in the complex plane is taken into consideration. think.

Here, the precoding hopping method of the time period N of the equation (174) is dealt with. At this time, according to <condition # 14>, s ₁ is received at N within the time period at all Γ terminals. The number of slots that take inferior points is 1 or less. Therefore, the log-likelihood ratio of the bits transmitted in _{s 1} (p) over the N-1 slot can be obtained. Similarly, <condition # 15>
As a result, in all Γ terminals, the number of slots that take the reception poor point of _{s 2 at N in the time cycle is 1 slot or less.} Therefore, the log-likelihood ratio of the bits transmitted in _{s 2} (p) over the N-1 slot can be obtained.

Therefore, it can be seen that the larger the time period N, the larger the number of slots from which the log-likelihood ratio can be obtained.
By the way, in the actual channel model, since it is affected by the scattered wave component, when the time period N is fixed, the data reception quality is improved when the minimum distance on the complex plane of the reception inferior point is as large as possible. It is considered possible. Therefore, in (Example # 7) and (Example # 8), α ≠ 1, and consider an improved precoding hopping method in (Example # 7) and (Example # 8). First, an improved precoding method (Example # 8), which is easy to understand, will be described.
(Example # 9)
From equation (186), the precoding matrix in the precoding hopping method with a time period N = 8 which is an improvement of (Example # 7) is given by the following equation.

However, i = 0,1, ..., 7. Further, as a precoding matrix different from Eq. (190), it can be given as follows (i = 0,1, ..., 7) (λ, θ ₁₁ [i] does not change with time (1). May change).).

or,

or,

or,

or,

or,

or,

Therefore, the _{poor reception points of s 1} and s ₂ are shown in FIG. 35 (a) when α <1.0 and in FIG. 35 (b) when α> 1.0.
(i) When α <1.0 When α <1.0, the minimum distance of the reception inferior point in the complex plane is the distance between the reception inferior points # 1 and # 2 (d _{# 1, # 2} ) and the reception inferior point # 1. Focusing on the distance between and # 3 (d _{# 1, # 3} ), min {d _{# 1,}
It is represented as _{# 2} , d _{# 1, # 3}.} At this time, _{the relationship between α and d # 1, # 2} and d _{# 1, # 3} is shown in FIG. And α that maximizes min {d _{# 1, # 2} , d _{# 1, # 3} } is

Will be. At this time, min {d _{# 1, # 2} , d _{# 1, # 3} } is

Will be. Therefore, in the equations (190) to (197), the precoding method in which α is given by the equation (198) is effective. However, setting the value of α to equation (198) is one appropriate way to obtain good data reception quality. However, even if α is set so as to take a value close to the equation (198), there is a possibility that good data reception quality can be obtained in the same manner. Therefore, the set value of α is not limited to the equation (198).

(ii) When α> 1.0 When α> 1.0, the minimum distance of the reception inferior point in the complex plane is the distance between the reception inferior points # 4 and # 5 (d _{# 4, # 5} ) and the reception inferior point # 4. Focusing on the distance between and # 6 (d _{# 4, # 6} ), min {d _{# 4,}
It is represented as _{# 5} , d _{# 4, # 6}.} At this time, _{the relationship between α and d # 4, # 5} and d _{# 4, # 6} is shown in FIG. 37. And α that maximizes min {d _{# 4, # 5} , d _{# 4, # 6} } is

Will be. At this time, min {d _{# 4, # 5} , d _{# 4, # 6} } is

Will be. Therefore, in the equations (190) to (197), the precoding method in which α is given by the equation (200) is effective. However, setting the value of α as the equation (200) is one appropriate method for obtaining good data reception quality. However, even if α is set so as to take a value close to the equation (200), there is a possibility that good data reception quality can be obtained in the same manner. Therefore, the set value of α is not limited to the equation (200).
(Example # 10)
The precoding matrix in the precoding hopping method with a time period N = 16 which is an improvement of (Example # 7) from the examination of (Example # 9) can be given by the following equation (λ, θ ₁₁ [i] is temporally. It shall not change (it may change).

When i = 0,1,…,7:

When i = 8,9,…,15:

or,
When i = 0,1,…,7:

When i = 8,9,…,15:

or,
When i = 0,1,…,7:

When i = 8,9,…,15:

or,
When i = 0,1,…,7:

When i = 8,9,…,15:

or,
When i = 0,1,…,7:

When i = 8,9,…,15:

or,
When i = 0,1,…,7:

When i = 8,9,…,15:

or,
When i = 0,1,…,7:

When i = 8,9,…,15:

or,
When i = 0,1,…,7:

When i = 8,9,…,15:

However, α is suitable for obtaining good data reception quality when it becomes the formula (198) or the formula (200). At this time, the _{poor reception points of s 1} are shown in FIGS. 38 (a) and (b) when α <1.0 and in FIGS. 39 (a) and (b) when α> 1.0.

In this embodiment, a method of constructing N different precoding matrices for a precoding hopping method having a time period N has been described. At this time, F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], F [N-1] are prepared as N different precoding matrices. However, since this embodiment is described by taking the case of the single carrier transmission method as an example, F [0], F [1], F [2], ... , F [N-2], F [N-1] have been described in this order, but the present invention is not limited to this, and N different precoding matrices F [0] generated in the present embodiment have been described. , F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], F [N-1] can also be applied to multi-carrier transmission methods such as OFDM transmission methods. As for the application method in this case, the precoding weight can be changed by arranging the symbols on the frequency axis and the frequency-time axis as in the first embodiment. Although it is described as a precoding hopping method having a time period N, the same effect can be obtained by randomly using N different precoding matrices, that is, a regular period is not always used. You don't have to use N different precoding matrices to have.

Examples # 5 to # 10 are shown based on <Condition # 10> to <Condition # 16>. In order to lengthen the switching cycle of the precoding matrix, for example, a plurality of examples # 5 to # 10 are shown. An example may be selected and a long-period precoding matrix switching method may be realized by using the precoding matrix shown in the selected example. For example, the precoding matrix shown in Example # 7 and the precoding matrix shown in Example # 10 are used to realize a long-period precoding matrix switching method. In this case, it does not always follow <Condition # 10> to <Condition # 16>. (<Condition # 10> formula (158), <Condition # 11> formula (159), <Condition # 13> formula (164), <Condition # 14> formula (175), <Condition # 15> In the equation (176) of the above, the condition of "x of existence, y of existence" is important in order to give good reception quality, where "all x, all y" is used. From another point of view, it is good if any of the precoding matrices of Examples # 5 to # 10 is included in the precoding matrix switching method of period N (N is a large natural number). It is more likely to give good reception quality.
(Embodiment 7)
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the receiving device that receives the modulated signal transmitted by the transmission method of regularly switching the precoding matrix described in the first to sixth embodiments will be described.

In the first embodiment, a transmitting device that transmits a modulated signal using a transmission method that periodically switches the precoding matrix transmits information about the precoding matrix, and a receiving device uses the information for a transmission frame based on the information. The method of obtaining the regular precoding matrix switching information, decoding the precoding, detecting the detection, obtaining the log-like likelihood ratio of the transmission bit, and then performing the error correction decoding has been described.

In the present embodiment, a configuration of the receiving device different from the above and a method of switching the precoding matrix will be described.
FIG. 40 shows an example of the configuration of the transmission device according to the present embodiment, and the same reference numerals are given to those operating in the same manner as in FIG. The encoder group (4002) receives a transmission bit (4001) as an input. At this time, as described in the first embodiment, the encoder group (4002) holds a plurality of coding units of the error correction code, and based on the frame configuration signal 313, for example, one coding. Any number of two encoders and four encoders will operate.

When one encoder operates, the transmission bit (4001) is encoded to obtain the encoded transmission bit, and the encoded transmission bit is distributed and distributed to two systems. The encoder group (4002) outputs the bits (4003A) and the distributed bits (4003B).

When two encoders operate, the transmission bit (4001) is divided into two (named division bits A and B), and the first encoder takes the division bit A as an input and performs encoding. Then, the encoded bits are output as distributed bits (4003A). The second encoder takes the divided bit B as an input, performs coding, and outputs the encoded bit as a distributed bit (4003B).

When four encoders operate, the transmission bit (4001) is divided into four (named division bits A, B, C, and D), and the first encoder receives the division bit A as an input. , Encoding is performed, and the encoded bit A is output. The second encoder takes the divided bit B as an input, performs coding, and outputs the encoded bit B. The third encoder takes the divided bit C as an input, performs coding, and outputs the encoded bit C. The fourth encoder takes the divided bit D as an input, performs coding, and outputs the encoded bit D. Then, the encoded bits A, B, C, and D are divided into distributed bits (4003A) and distributed bits (4003B).

As an example, the transmitting device will support the transmitting methods as shown in Table 1 (Table 1A and Table 1B) below.

As shown in Table 1, the number of transmitted signals (number of transmitting antennas) supports the transmission of one stream of signals and the transmission of two streams of signals. The modulation scheme also supports QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM, 256QAM and 1024QAM. In particular, when the number of transmission signals is 2, the modulation method can be set separately for stream # 1 and stream # 2.
For example, in Table 1, "# 1: 256QAM, # 2: 1024QAM" indicates that "the modulation method of stream # 1 is 256QAM, and the modulation method of stream # 2 is 1024QAM" (the other expressions are expressed in the same manner). doing). It is assumed that three types of error correction coding methods, A, B, and C, are supported. At this time, A, B, and C may all have different codes, A, B, and C may have different coding rates, and A, B, and C may have different block size coding methods. It may be.

For the transmission information in Table 1, each transmission information is assigned to each mode in which the "number of transmission signals", "modulation method", "number of encoders", and "error correction coding method" are defined. Therefore, for example, in the case of "number of transmission signals: 2", "modulation method: # 1: 1024QAM, # 2: 1024QAM", "number of encoders: 4", and "error correction coding method: C", the transmission information is set to 01001101. Set. Then, the transmission device transmits the transmission information and the transmission data in the frame. Then, when transmitting the transmission data, particularly when the "number of transmission signals" is 2, the "precoding matrix switching method" is used according to Table 1. In Table 1, five types of "precoding matrix switching method", D, E, F, G, and H, are prepared, and one of these five types is set according to Table 1. .. At this time, as five different realization methods,
・ Prepare and realize 5 types with different precoding matrices.
-It is realized by setting five different types of cycles, for example, the period of D to 4, the period of E to 8, and so on.
-It is realized by using both different precoding matrices and different periods together.
Etc. are conceivable.

FIG. 41 shows an example of a frame configuration of a modulated signal transmitted by the transmitting device of FIG. 40, in which the transmitting device sets a mode for transmitting two modulated signals z1 (t) and z2 (t). It is assumed that both the mode for transmitting one modulated signal and the mode for transmitting one modulated signal can be set.

In FIG. 41, the symbol (4100) is a symbol for transmitting the “transmission information” shown in Table 1. The symbols (4101-1 and 4101_2) are reference (pilot) symbols for channel estimation. The symbol (4102_1, 4103_1) is a symbol for data transmission transmitted by the modulated signal z1 (t), and the symbol (4102_1, 4103_1) is a symbol for data transmission transmitted by the modulated signal z2 (t). The 4102_1) and the symbol (4102_2) are transmitted at the same time using the same (common) frequency, and the symbol (4103_1) and the symbol (4103_2) are transmitted at the same time using the same (common) frequency. Then, the symbols (4102_1, 4103_1) and the symbols (4102_2, 4103_1) are pre-programmed when the method of regularly switching the precoding matrix described in the first to fourth embodiments and the sixth embodiment is used. It becomes a symbol after the coding matrix operation (hence, as described in the first embodiment, the configuration of the streams s1 (t) and s2 (t) is as shown in FIG. 6).
Further, in FIG. 41, the symbol (4104) is a symbol for transmitting the “transmission information” shown in Table 1. Symbol (4105) is a reference (pilot) symbol for channel estimation. The symbol (4106, 4107) is a symbol for data transmission transmitted by the modulated signal z1 (t), and at this time, the symbol for data transmission transmitted by the modulated signal z1 (t) has one transmission signal. , Precoding is not done.

Therefore, the transmitting device of FIG. 40 generates and transmits the modulated signal according to the frame configuration of FIG. 41 and Table 1. In FIG. 40, the frame configuration signal 313 includes information regarding the “number of transmitted signals”, “modulation method”, “number of encoders”, and “error correction coding method” set based on Table 1. Then, the coding unit (4002), the mapping units 306A, B, and the weighting synthesis units 308A, B take the frame configuration signal as an input, and set the "number of transmission signals", "modulation method", and "encoder" based on Table 1. The operation is based on the "number" and "error correction coding method". Further, the "transmission information" corresponding to the set "number of transmission signals", "modulation method", "number of encoders", and "error correction coding method" is also transmitted to the receiving device.

The configuration of the receiving device can be represented in FIG. 7 as in the first embodiment. The difference from the first embodiment is that the information in Table 1 is shared in advance by the transmitting / receiving device, so that the transmitting device does not transmit the information of the precoding matrix to be regularly switched, but the “number of transmitted signals”. The transmitting device transmits "transmission information" corresponding to the "modulation method", "number of encoders", and "error correction coding method", and the receiving device obtains this information to regularly switch from Table 1. The point is that information on the coding matrix can be obtained. Therefore, in the receiving device of FIG. 7, the control information decoding unit 709 obtains the “transmission information” transmitted by the transmitting device of FIG. 40, so that the information of the precoding matrix that is regularly switched from the information corresponding to Table 1 is obtained. A signal 710 regarding the transmission method information notified by the transmission device including the above can be obtained. Therefore, when the number of transmitted signals is 2, the signal processing unit 711 can perform detection based on the switching pattern of the precoding matrix, and can obtain the received log-likelihood ratio.

In the above description, as shown in Table 1, "transmission information" is set for "number of transmission signals", "modulation method", "number of encoders", and "error correction coding method", and precoding is performed for this. Although the matrix switching method is set, it is not always necessary to set "transmission information" for "number of transmission signals", "modulation method", "number of encoders", and "error correction coding method", for example. , As shown in Table 2, "transmission information" may be set for "number of transmission signals" and "modulation method", and a precoding matrix switching method may be set for this.

Here, the setting method of "transmission information" and the precoding matrix switching method is not limited to Table 1 and Table 2, and the precoding matrix switching method includes "number of transmission signals", "modulation method", and "code". If the rules are predetermined to switch based on the transmission parameters such as "number of converters" and "error correction coding method" (if the transmitters and receivers share the predetermined rules), (That is, if the precoding matrix switching method is switched by one of the transmission parameters (or one consisting of multiple transmission parameters)), the transmitter provides information about the precoding matrix switching method. There is no need for transmission, and the receiving device can determine the precoding matrix switching method used by the transmitting device by discriminating the information of the transmission parameters, so that accurate decoding and detection can be performed. In Tables 1 and 2, when the number of transmission modulation signals is 2, the transmission method of regularly switching the precoding matrix is used. However, if the number of transmission modulation signals is 2 or more, the precoding matrix is regularly switched. A transmission method for switching the coding matrix can be applied.

Therefore, if the transmitter / receiver shares a table of transmit parameters that include information about the precoding switching method, the transmitter does not transmit information about the precoding switching method and does not include information about the precoding switching method. By transmitting the information and obtaining this control information, the receiving device can estimate the precoding switching method.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the transmitting device does not transmit direct information on how to regularly switch the precoding matrix, and the receiving device uses the “regularly precoding matrix” used by the transmitting device. The method of estimating the information about the precoding of "How to switch" was explained. As a result, the transmitting device does not transmit direct information regarding the method of regularly switching the precoding matrix, so that the effect of improving the data transmission efficiency can be obtained.

In the present embodiment, the embodiment when the precoding weight is changed on the time axis has been described, but as described in the first embodiment, even when a multi-carrier transmission method such as OFDM transmission is used. The embodiment can be implemented in the same manner.

Further, in particular, when the precoding switching method is changed only by the number of transmitted signals, the receiving device can perform the precoding switching method by obtaining information on the number of transmitted signals transmitted by the transmitting device. ..

In the present specification, it is considered that a transmitting device is provided in, for example, a communication / broadcasting device such as a broadcasting station, a base station, an access point, a terminal, or a mobile phone (mobile phone). It is conceivable that the receiving device is provided in a communication device such as a television, a radio, a terminal, a personal computer, a mobile phone, an access point, or a base station. Further, the transmitting device and the receiving device in the present invention are devices having a communication function, and the device provides some kind of interface to a device for executing an application such as a television, a radio, a personal computer, and a mobile phone. It is also conceivable that the form can be connected by disconnecting.

Further, in the present embodiment, symbols other than the data symbols, for example, pilot symbols (preambles, unique words, postambles, reference symbols, etc.), symbols for control information, and the like are arranged in the frame regardless of how they are arranged. good. And here, it is named as a pilot symbol and a symbol for control information, but any naming method may be used, and the function itself is important.

The pilot symbol may be, for example, a known symbol modulated using PSK modulation in the transmitter / receiver (or by synchronizing the receiver, the receiver may be able to know the symbol transmitted by the transmitter. The receiver may use this symbol to perform frequency synchronization, time synchronization, channel estimation (estimation of CSI (Channel State Information)), signal detection, and the like. Become.

In addition, the symbol for control information is information that needs to be transmitted to the communication partner (for example, the modulation method / error correction coding method used for communication) in order to realize communication other than data (application, etc.). It is a symbol for transmitting error correction coding method coding rate, setting information in the upper layer, etc.).

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments 1 to 5, and can be modified in various ways. For example, in the above-described embodiment, the case of performing as a communication device is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and this communication method can also be performed as software.

Further, in the above, the precoding switching method in the method of transmitting the two modulated signals from the two antennas has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the four mapped signals are precoded and 4 In the method of generating one modulated signal and transmitting it from four antennas, that is, the method of precoding the N mapped signals, generating N modulated signals, and transmitting them from N antennas. Similarly, the precoding weight (matrix) can be changed as well as the precoding switching method.

In the present specification, terms such as "precoding" and "precoding weight" are used, but the term itself may be any, and in the present invention, the signal processing itself is important.

Different data may be transmitted or the same data may be transmitted depending on the streams s1 (t) and s2 (t).
Both the transmitting antenna of the transmitting device and the receiving antenna of the receiving device, one antenna described in the drawings may be composed of a plurality of antennas.

In addition, for example, a program that executes the above communication method is stored in ROM (Read Only) in advance.
It may be stored in Memory) and the program may be operated by a CPU (Central Processor Unit).

Further, the program for executing the above communication method is stored in a computer-readable storage medium, the program stored in the storage medium is recorded in the RAM (Random Access Memory) of the computer, and the computer is operated according to the program. You may do so.

Then, each configuration such as each of the above-described embodiments may be realized as an LSI (Large Scale Integration), which is typically an integrated circuit. These may be individually integrated into one chip, or may be integrated into one chip so as to include all or a part of the configurations of each embodiment. Although it is referred to as an LSI here, it may be referred to as an IC (Integrated Circuit), a system LSI, a super LSI, or an ultra LSI depending on the degree of integration. Further, the method of making an integrated circuit is not limited to the LSI, and may be realized by a dedicated circuit or a general-purpose processor. An FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) that can be programmed after the LSI is manufactured, or a reconfigurable processor that can reconfigure the connection and settings of circuit cells inside the LSI may be used.

Furthermore, if an integrated circuit technology that replaces an LSI appears due to advances in semiconductor technology or another technology derived from it, it is naturally possible to integrate functional blocks using that technology. There is a possibility of adaptation of biotechnology.

(Embodiment 8)
In the present embodiment, an application example of the method of regularly switching the precoding weights described in the first to fourth embodiments and the sixth embodiment will be described here.

FIG. 6 shows a weighting method (precoding) in the present embodiment.
) Method), the weighting synthesis unit 600 is a weighting composition unit in which both the weighting composition units 308A and 308B of FIG. 3 are integrated. As shown in FIG. 6, streams s1 (t) and streams s2 (t) correspond to the baseband signals 307A and 307B of FIG. 3, that is, bases according to the mapping of modulation schemes such as QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM. The band signal has in-phase I and quadrature Q components. Then, as in the frame configuration of FIG. 6, the stream s1 (t) represents the signal of the symbol number u as s1 (u), the signal of the symbol number u + 1 as s1 (u + 1), and so on. Similarly, the stream s2 (t) represents the signal with the symbol number u as s2 (u), the signal with the symbol number u + 1 as s2 (u + 1), and so on. Then, the weighting synthesis unit 600 inputs the base band signals 307A (s1 (t)) and 307B (s2 (t)) in FIG. 3 and the information 315 regarding the weighting information, and uses the weighting method according to the information 315 regarding the weighting information. Then, the signals 309A (z1 (t)) and 309B (z2 (t)) after the weighted synthesis of FIG. 3 are output.

At this time, for example, when the precoding matrix switching method of the period N = 8 of Example 8 in the sixth embodiment is used, z1 (t) and z2 (t) are represented as follows.
When the symbol number is 8i (i is an integer of 0 or more):

However, j is an imaginary unit and k = 0.
When the symbol number is 8i + 1:

However, k = 1.
When the symbol number is 8i + 2:

However, k = 2.
When the symbol number is 8i + 3:

However, k = 3.
When the symbol number is 8i + 4:

However, k = 4.
When the symbol number is 8i + 5:

However, k = 5.
When the symbol number is 8i + 6:

However, k = 6.
When the symbol number is 8i + 7:

However, k = 7.
Here, although it is described as a symbol number, the symbol number may be considered as a time (time). As described in other embodiments, for example, in equation (225), z1 (8i + 7) and z2 (8i + 7) at time 8i + 7 are signals at the same time, and z1 (8i + 7) and z2 (8i + 7). Will be transmitted by the transmitter using the same (common) frequency. That is, if the signal at time T is s1 (T), s2 (T), z1 (T), z2 (T), then from some precoding matrix and s1 (T) and s2 (T), z1 (T) and The z2 (T) is obtained, and the z1 (T) and the z2 (T) are transmitted by the transmitting device (at the same time (time)) using the same (common) frequency. When a multi-carrier transmission method such as OFDM is used, the signals corresponding to s1, s2, z1, and z2 at the (sub) carrier L and time T are s1 (T, L), s2 (T, L), and z1. (T, L), z2 (T, L), from some precoding matrix and s1 (T, L) and s2 (T, L), z1 (T, L) and z
2 (T, L) is obtained, and z1 (T, L) and z2 (T, L) are transmitted by the transmitting device (at the same time (time)) using the same (common) frequency.

At this time, there is an equation (198) or an equation (200) as an appropriate value of α.
In this embodiment, a precoding switching method for increasing the period will be described based on the precoding matrix of the above equation (190).

When the period of the precoding switching matrix is 8M, 8M different precoding matrices are represented as follows.

At this time, i = 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7, k = 0,1, ..., M-2, M-1.
For example, when M = 2, and α <1, the poor reception points (◯) of s1 and the poor reception points (□) of s2 when k = 0 are as shown in FIG. 42 (a). Represented. Similarly, the reception poor point (◯) of s1 and the reception poor point (□) of s2 when k = 1 are represented as shown in FIG. 42 (b). In this way, based on the precoding matrix of equation (190), the reception inferior points are as shown in FIG. 42 (a), and ^{ejX is added to each element of the second row of the matrix on the right side of this equation (190).} By making the matrix obtained by multiplying by (see Equation (226)), the reception inferior point has a rotated reception inferior point with respect to FIG. 42 (a) (see FIG. 42 (b)). .. (However, the reception inferior points in FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b) do not overlap. In this way, even if the reception inferior points are multiplied by ^{e jX, the reception inferior points should not overlap.} instead of multiplying e ^jX to each element of the second row of the right side of the matrix 190), a matrix obtained by multiplying the e ^jX to each element of the first row of the matrix of the right side of the equation (190) as a pre-coding matrix At this time, the precoding matrices F [0] to F [15] are expressed by the following equations.

However, i = 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7, k = 0,1.
Then, when M = 2, the precoding matrix of F [0] to F [15] is generated (the precoding matrix of F [0] to F [15] should be arranged in what order. Also, the matrices of F [0] to F [15] may be different matrices.) Then, for example, precoding is performed using F [0] when the symbol number is 16i, precoding is performed using F [1] when the symbol number is 16i + 1, and ..., F [h] when the symbol number is 16i + h. ] Is used for precoding (h = 0, 1, 2, ..., 14, 15). (Here, as described in the previous embodiment, it is not always necessary to switch the precoding matrix regularly.)
Summarizing the above, the precoding matrix of period N is represented by the following equation with reference to equations (82) to (85).

At this time, since the period is N, i = 0,1,2, ···, N-2, N-1. And the formula (228
) Is based on the precoding matrix of period N × M expressed by the following equation.

At this time, i = 0,1,2, ···, N-2, N-1, k = 0,1, ···, M-2, M-1.
Then, the precoding matrix of F [0] to F [N × M-1] is generated (the precoding matrix of F [0] to F [N × M-1] has a period of N × M. You can use them in any order.) Then, for example, when the symbol number N × M × i, F [0] is used for precoding, and when the symbol number N × M × i + 1, F [1] is used for precoding. Precoding is performed using F [h] when the symbol number is N × M × i + h (h = 0, 1, 2,
..., N × M-2, N × M-1). (Here, as described in the previous embodiment, it is not always necessary to switch the precoding matrix regularly.)
By generating the precoding matrix in this way, it is possible to realize a method of switching the precoding matrix having a large period, and it is possible to easily change the position of the poor reception point, which improves the reception quality of data. May lead to. Although the precoding matrix having a period of N × M is set to the equation (229), the precoding matrix having a period of N × M may be set to the following equation as described above.

At this time, i = 0,1,2, ···, N-2, N-1, k = 0,1, ···, M-2, M-1.

In equations (229) and (230), when 0 radians ≤ δ <2π radians, a unitary matrix is obtained when δ = π radians, and a non-unitary matrix is obtained when δ ≠ π radians. In this method, one characteristic configuration is the case of a non-unitary matrix of π / 2 radians ≤ | δ | <π radians (the condition of δ is the same for other embodiments). , Good data reception quality will be obtained. As another configuration, there is a case of a unitary matrix, which will be described in detail in the tenth embodiment and the sixteenth embodiment. In the equations (229) and (230), when N is an odd number, good data reception The chances of getting quality are high.

(Embodiment 9)
In this embodiment, a method of regularly switching the precoding matrix using the unitary matrix will be described.

In the method of regularly switching the precoding matrix of the period N as described in the eighth embodiment, the precoding matrix prepared for the period N with reference to the equations (82) to (85) is described by the following equation. Represented by.

At this time, i = 0,1,2, ···, N-2, N-1. (It is assumed that α> 0.) Since the unitary matrix is handled in the present embodiment, the precoding matrix of the equation (231) can be expressed by the following equation.

At this time, i = 0,1,2, ···, N-2, N-1. (It is assumed that α> 0.) At this time, from the condition 5 of (Equation 106) and the condition 6 of (Equation 107) of the third embodiment, the following conditions provide good data reception quality. It is important to get it.

(X is 0,1,2, ···, N-2, N-1, y is 0,1,2, ···, N-2, N-1, and x ≠ y. .)

(X is 0,1,2, ···, N-2, N-1, y is 0,1,2, ···, N-2, N-1, and x ≠ y. .)

In the description of the sixth embodiment, the distance between the reception poor points has been described, but in order to increase the distance between the reception poor points, it is important that the period N is an odd number of 3 or more. This point will be described below.

As described in the sixth embodiment, <condition 19> or <condition 20> is given in order to arrange the reception inferior points on the complex plane so as to have a uniform distribution with respect to the phase.

That is, in <Condition 19>, it means that the phase difference is 2π / N radians. Further, in <Condition 20>, it means that the phase difference is -2π / N radians.


Then, when θ ₁₁ (0) −θ ₂₁ (0) = 0 radians and α <1, the reception inferior point of s1 and the reception inferior point of s2 are on the complex plane when the period N = 3. Arrangement in FIG. 43 (a)
In FIG. 43, the arrangement of the reception inferior point of s1 and the reception inferior point of s2 on the complex plane when the period N = 4 is shown.
Shown in b). Further, when θ ₁₁ (0) −θ ₂₁ (0) = 0 radians and α> 1, when the period N = 3, the reception inferior point of s1 and the reception inferior point of s2 are on the complex plane. Arrangement in Fig. 4
FIG. 4 (a) shows the arrangement of the reception inferior point of s1 and the reception inferior point of s2 on the complex plane when the period N = 4 is shown in FIG. 44 (b).

At this time, when considering the phase formed by the line segment formed by the reception poor point and the origin and the half line formed by Real ≧ 0 on the Real axis (see FIG. 43 (a)), α> 1, In any case of α <1, when N = 4, the above-mentioned phase at the reception poor point regarding s1 and the above-mentioned phase at the reception poor point regarding s2 always have the same value. (See 4301, 4302 in FIG. 43 and 4401, 4402 in FIG. 44) At this time, the distance between the reception inferior points becomes smaller in the complex plane. On the other hand, when N = 3, it does not occur when the above-mentioned phase at the reception poor point regarding s1 and the above-mentioned phase at the reception poor point regarding s2 have the same value.

From the above, considering that when the period N is an even number, the above-mentioned phase at the reception poor point regarding s1 and the above-mentioned phase at the reception poor point regarding s2 always have the same value, the period N is odd. Compared to the case where the period N is even, the distance between the reception poor points is more likely to be larger in the complex plane. However, when the period N is a small value, for example, N ≦ 16 or less, the minimum distance of the reception inferior points in the complex plane can be secured to some extent because the number of reception inferior points existing is small. Therefore, when N ≦ 16, there may be a case where the data reception quality can be ensured even if the number is even.

Therefore, in the method of regularly switching the precoding matrix based on the equation (232), if the period N is an odd number, it is highly possible that the data reception quality can be improved. The precoding matrix of F [0] to F [N-1] is generated based on the equation (232) (the precoding matrix of F [0] to F [N-1] has a period N. You can use them in any order.) Then, for example, when the symbol number is Ni, precoding is performed using F [0], and when the symbol number is Ni + 1, precoding is performed using F [1].
When the symbol number is N × i + h, precoding is performed using F [h] (h = 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, N-1). (Here, as described in the previous embodiment, it is not always necessary to switch the precoding matrix regularly.) Further, when the modulation methods of s1 and s2 are both 16QAM, α is set.

Then, it may be possible to obtain the effect that the minimum distance between 16 × 16 = 256 signal points in the IQ plane can be increased in a specific LOS environment.
In this embodiment, a method of constructing N different precoding matrices for a precoding hopping method having a time period N has been described. At this time, F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], F [N-1] are prepared as N different precoding matrices. However, since this embodiment is described by taking the case of the single carrier transmission method as an example, F [0], F [1], F [2], ... , F [N-2], F [N-1] have been described in this order, but the present invention is not limited to this, and N different precoding matrices F [0] generated in the present embodiment have been described. , F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], F [N-1] can also be applied to multi-carrier transmission methods such as OFDM transmission methods. As for the application method in this case, the precoding weight can be changed by arranging the symbols on the frequency axis and the frequency-time axis as in the first embodiment. Although it is described as a precoding hopping method having a time period N, the same effect can be obtained by randomly using N different precoding matrices, that is, a regular period is not always used. You don't have to use N different precoding matrices to have.

Further, in the precoding matrix switching method of period H (where H is a method in which the precoding matrix is regularly switched and the period N is a larger natural number), N different precoding matrices in the present embodiment are included. If it is, there is a high possibility that good reception quality will be given. At this time, <condition # 17> and <condition # 18> can be replaced with the following conditions. (Think of the cycle as N.)

(X is 0,1,2, ···, N-2, N-1, y is 0,1,2, ···, N-2, N-1, and x ≠ y. .)

(X is 0,1,2, ···, N-2, N-1, y is 0,1,2, ···, N-2, N-1, and x ≠ y. .)
(Embodiment 10)
In the present embodiment, an example different from that of the ninth embodiment will be described with respect to a method of regularly switching the precoding matrix using the unitary matrix.

In the method of regularly switching the precoding matrix with period 2N, the precoding matrix prepared for period 2N is expressed by the following equation.

It is assumed that α> 0 and that it is a fixed value (regardless of i).

It is assumed that α> 0 and that it is a fixed value (regardless of i). (It is assumed that α in equation (234) and α in equation (235) have the same value.)
At this time, from the condition 5 of (Equation 106) and the condition 6 of (Equation 107) of the third embodiment, the following conditions are satisfied with respect to the equation (234) in order to obtain good data reception quality. It becomes important.

(X is 0,1,2, ···, N-2, N-1, y is 0,1,2, ···, N-2, N-1, and x ≠ y. .)

(X is 0,1,2, ···, N-2, N-1, y is 0,1,2, ···, N-2, N-1, and x ≠ y. .)

Then, consider adding the following conditions.

Next, as described in the sixth embodiment, <condition # 24> or <condition # 25> is set in order to arrange the reception inferior points on the complex plane so as to have a uniform distribution with respect to the phase. give.

That is, in <condition 24>, it means that the phase difference is 2π / N radians. Further, in <Condition 25>, it means that the phase difference is -2π / N radians.

Then, when θ ₁₁ (0) −θ ₂₁ (0) = 0 radians and α> 1, the reception inferior point of s1 and the reception inferior point of s2 at N = 4 on the complex plane. Arrangement is shown in FIGS. 45 (a) and 45 (b).
Shown in. As can be seen from FIGS. 45 (a) and 45 (b), in the complex plane, the minimum distance of the poor reception point of s1 is kept large, and similarly, the minimum distance of the poor reception point of s2 is also kept large. There is. Then, the same state is obtained when α <1. Further, when considered in the same manner as in the ninth embodiment, it is more likely that the distance between the reception inferior points becomes larger in the complex plane when N is an odd number than when N is an even number. However, when N is a small value, for example, N ≦ 16 or less, the minimum distance of the reception inferior points in the complex plane can be secured to some extent because the number of reception inferior points existing is small. Therefore, when N ≦ 16, there may be a case where the data reception quality can be ensured even if the number is even.

Therefore, in the method of regularly switching the precoding matrix based on the equations (234) and (235), if N is an odd number, it is highly possible that the data reception quality can be improved. The precoding matrix of F [0] to F [2N-1] is generated based on the equations (234) and (235) (precoding matrix of F [0] to F [2N-1]). Can be used in any order for a period of 2N.) Then, for example, precoding is performed using F [0] when the symbol number is 2Ni, precoding is performed using F [1] when the symbol number is 2Ni + 1, and ..., F when the symbol number is 2N × i + h. Precoding is performed using [h] (h = 0, 1, 2, ..., 2N-2, 2N-1). (Here, as described in the previous embodiment, the precoding matrix does not necessarily have to be switched regularly.) Further, when the modulation methods of s1 and s2 are both 16QAM, α is expressed by the equation (233). ), It may be possible to obtain the effect that the minimum distance between 16 × 16 = 256 signal points in the IQ plane can be increased in a specific LOS environment.

Further, the following conditions are considered as conditions different from <Condition # 23>.

(X is N, N + 1, N + 2, ..., 2N-2,2N-1 and y is N, N + 1, N + 2, ..., 2N-2,2N-1 And x ≠ y.)

(X is N, N + 1, N + 2, ..., 2N-2,2N-1 and y is N, N + 1, N + 2, ..., 2N-2,2N-1 And x ≠ y.)
At this time, by satisfying <condition # 21>, <condition # 22>, <condition # 26>, and <condition # 27>, the distance between the reception inferior points between s1s in the complex plane can be increased, and the distance between s2s can be increased. Since the distance between the reception inferior points can be increased, good data reception quality can be obtained.

In this embodiment, a method of constructing 2N different precoding matrices for a precoding hopping method having a time period of 2N has been described. At this time, F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [2N-2], F [2N-1] are prepared as 2N different precoding matrices. However, since this embodiment is described by taking the case of the single carrier transmission method as an example, F [0], F [1], F [2], ... , F [2N-2], F [2N-1] have been described in this order, but the present invention is not limited to this, and 2N different precoding matrices F [0] generated in the present embodiment have been described. , F [1], F [2], ..., F [2N-2], F [2N-1] can also be applied to multi-carrier transmission methods such as OFDM transmission methods. As for the application method in this case, the precoding weight can be changed by arranging the symbols on the frequency axis and the frequency-time axis as in the first embodiment. Although it is described as a precoding hopping method with a time period of 2N, the same effect can be obtained by randomly using 2N different precoding matrices, that is, a regular period is not always used. You don't have to use 2N different precoding matrices to have.

Further, in the precoding matrix switching method of period H (where H is a method in which the precoding matrix is regularly switched and the period 2N is a larger natural number), 2N different precoding matrices in the present embodiment are included. If it is, there is a high possibility that good reception quality will be given.
(Embodiment 11)
In this embodiment, a method of regularly switching the precoding matrix using a non-unitary matrix will be described.

In the method of regularly switching the precoding matrix with period 2N, the precoding matrix prepared for period 2N is expressed by the following equation.

It is assumed that α> 0 and that it is a fixed value (regardless of i). Also, let δ ≠ π radians.

It is assumed that α> 0 and that it is a fixed value (regardless of i). (It is assumed that α in equation (236) and α in equation (237) have the same value.)
At this time, from the condition 5 of (Equation 106) and the condition 6 of (Equation 107) of the third embodiment, the following conditions are satisfied with respect to the equation (236) in order to obtain good data reception quality. It becomes important.

(X is 0,1,2, ···, N-2, N-1, y is 0,1,2, ···, N-2, N-1, and x ≠ y. .)

(X is 0,1,2, ···, N-2, N-1, y is 0,1,2, ···, N-2, N-1, and x ≠ y. .)

Then, consider adding the following conditions.

In addition, instead of the equation (237), the precoding matrix of the following equation may be given.

It is assumed that α> 0 and that it is a fixed value (regardless of i). (It is assumed that α in equation (236) and α in equation (238) have the same value.)
As an example, as described in the sixth embodiment, <condition # 31> or <condition # 32> is set in order to arrange the reception inferior points on the complex plane so as to have a uniform distribution with respect to the phase. give.

That is, in <condition 31>, it means that the phase difference is 2π / N radians. Further, in <Condition 32>, it means that the phase difference is -2π / N radians.
Then, when θ ₁₁ (0) −θ ₂₁ (0) = 0 radians, α> 1, and δ = (3π) / 4 radians, the reception poor point of s1 and s2 when N = 4 The arrangement of the poor reception points on the complex plane is shown in FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b). By doing so, the period for switching the pull coding matrix can be increased, and the minimum distance of the reception poor point of s1 is kept large in the complex plane, and similarly, the reception poor point of s2 is kept large. Since the minimum distance between points can be kept large, good reception quality can be obtained. Here, the case where α> 1, δ = (3π) / 4 radians, and N = 4 has been described as an example, but the description is not limited to this, and π / 2 radians ≤ | δ | <π radians and α. If> 0 and α ≠ 1, the same effect can be obtained.

Further, the following conditions are considered as conditions different from <Condition # 30>.

(X is N, N + 1, N + 2, ..., 2N-2,2N-1 and y is N, N + 1, N + 2, ..., 2N-2,2N-1 And x ≠ y.)

(X is N, N + 1, N + 2, ..., 2N-2,2N-1 and y is N, N + 1, N + 2, ..., 2N-2,2N-1 And x ≠ y.)
At this time, by satisfying <Condition # 28>, <Condition # 29>, <Condition # 33>, and <Condition # 34>, the distance between the reception inferior points between s1s in the complex plane can be increased, and the distance between s2s can be increased. Since the distance between the reception inferior points can be increased, good data reception quality can be obtained.

In this embodiment, a method of constructing 2N different precoding matrices for a precoding hopping method having a time period of 2N has been described. At this time, F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [2N-2], F [2N-1] are prepared as 2N different precoding matrices. However, since this embodiment is described by taking the case of the single carrier transmission method as an example, F [0], F [1], F [2], ... , F [2N-2], F [2N-1] have been described in this order, but the present invention is not limited to this, and 2N different precoding matrices F [0] generated in the present embodiment have been described. , F [1], F [2], ..., F [2N-2], F [2N-1] can also be applied to multi-carrier transmission methods such as OFDM transmission methods. As for the application method in this case, the precoding weight can be changed by arranging the symbols on the frequency axis and the frequency-time axis as in the first embodiment. Although it is described as a precoding hopping method with a time period of 2N, the same effect can be obtained by randomly using 2N different precoding matrices, that is, a regular period is not always used. You don't have to use 2N different precoding matrices to have.

Further, in the precoding matrix switching method of period H (where H is a method in which the precoding matrix is regularly switched and the period 2N is a larger natural number), 2N different precoding matrices in the present embodiment are included. If it is, there is a high possibility that good reception quality will be given.
(Embodiment 12)
In this embodiment, a method of regularly switching the precoding matrix using a non-unitary matrix will be described.
In the method of regularly switching the precoding matrix of the period N, the precoding matrix prepared for the period N is expressed by the following equation.

It is assumed that α> 0 and that it is a fixed value (regardless of i). Also, let δ ≠ π radian (fixed value regardless of i), i = 0,1,2, ···, N-2, N-1.
At this time, from the condition 5 of (Equation 106) and the condition 6 of (Equation 107) of the third embodiment, the following conditions are satisfied with respect to the equation (239) in order to obtain good data reception quality. It becomes important.

(X is 0,1,2, ···, N-2, N-1, y is 0,1,2, ···, N-2, N-1, and x ≠ y. .)

(X is 0,1,2, ···, N-2, N-1, y is 0,1,2, ···, N-2, N-1, and x ≠ y. .)
As an example, as described in the sixth embodiment, <condition # 37> or <condition # 38> is set in order to arrange the reception inferior points on the complex plane so as to have a uniform distribution with respect to the phase. give.

That is, in <condition 37>, it means that the phase difference is 2π / N radians. Further, in <Condition 38>, it means that the phase difference is -2π / N radians.
At this time, if π / 2 radian ≤ | δ | <π radian, α> 0, and α ≠ 1, the distance between the reception inferior points between s1s in the complex plane is large, and the reception between s2s is large. Since the distance between the inferior points can be increased, good data reception quality can be obtained. Note that <condition # 37> and <condition # 38> are not necessarily necessary conditions.

In this embodiment, a method of constructing N different precoding matrices for a precoding hopping method having a time period N has been described. At this time, F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], F [N-1] are prepared as N different precoding matrices. However, since this embodiment is described by taking the case of the single carrier transmission method as an example, F [0], F [1], F [2], ... , F [N-2], F [N-1] have been described in this order, but the present invention is not limited to this, and 2N different precoding matrices F [0] generated in the present embodiment have been described. , F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], F [N-1] can also be applied to multi-carrier transmission methods such as OFDM transmission methods. As for the application method in this case, the precoding weight can be changed by arranging the symbols on the frequency axis and the frequency-time axis as in the first embodiment. Although it is described as a precoding hopping method having a time period N, the same effect can be obtained by randomly using N different precoding matrices, that is, a regular period is not always used. You don't have to use N different precoding matrices to have.

Further, in the precoding matrix switching method of period H (where H is a method in which the precoding matrix is regularly switched and the period N is a larger natural number), N different precoding matrices in the present embodiment are included. If it is, there is a high possibility that good reception quality will be given. At this time, <condition # 35> and <condition # 36> can be replaced with the following conditions. (Think of the cycle as N.)

(X is 0,1,2, ···, N-2, N-1, y is 0,1,2, ···, N-2, N-1, and x ≠ y. .)

(X is 0,1,2, ···, N-2, N-1, y is 0,1,2, ···, N-2, N-1, and x ≠ y. .)

(Embodiment 13)
In this embodiment, another example of the eighth embodiment will be described.

In the method of regularly switching the precoding matrix with period 2N, the precoding matrix prepared for period 2N is expressed by the following equation.

It is assumed that α> 0 and that it is a fixed value (regardless of i). Also, let δ ≠ π radians.

It is assumed that α> 0 and that it is a fixed value (regardless of i). (It is assumed that α in equation (240) and α in equation (241) have the same value.)
Then, a precoding matrix having a period of 2 × N × M based on the equations (240) and (241) is expressed by the following equation.

At this time, k = 0,1, ..., M-2, M-1.

At this time, k = 0,1, ..., M-2, M-1. Further, Xk = Yk or Xk ≠ Yk.
Then, the precoding matrix of F [0] to F [2 × N × M-1] is generated (the precoding matrix of F [0] to F [2 × N × M-1] is Cycle 2 x N x M You can use them in any order.) Then, for example, when the symbol number is 2 × N × M × i, precoding is performed using F [0], and when the symbol number is 2 × N × M × i + 1, precoding is performed using F [1]. ..., Precoding is performed using F [h] when the symbol number is 2 × N × M × i + h (h = 0, 1, 2, ・ ・ ・, 2 × N × M-2, 2 × N × M-1) (Here, as described in the previous embodiment, it is not always necessary to switch the precoding matrix regularly.)
By generating the precoding matrix in this way, it is possible to realize a method of switching the precoding matrix having a large period, and it is possible to easily change the position of the poor reception point, which improves the reception quality of data. May lead to.

The equation (242) of the precoding matrix having a period of 2 × N × M may be changed to the following equation.

At this time, k = 0,1, ..., M-2, M-1.
Further, the equation (243) of the precoding matrix having a period of 2 × N × M is changed from the equations (245) to the equations (24).
It may be any of 7).

At this time, k = 0,1, ..., M-2, M-1.

At this time, k = 0,1, ..., M-2, M-1.

At this time, k = 0,1, ..., M-2, M-1.
Focusing on the poor reception points, in equations (242) to (247),

(X is 0,1,2, ···, N-2, N-1, y is 0,1,2, ···, N-2, N-1, and x ≠ y. .)

(X is 0,1,2, ···, N-2, N-1, y is 0,1,2, ···, N-2, N-1, and x ≠ y. .)

Good data reception quality can be obtained if all of the above are satisfied. In the eighth embodiment, <condition # 39> and <condition # 40> may be satisfied.
Further, focusing on Xk and Yk of equations (242) to (247),

(A is 0,1,2, ···, M-2, M -1, b is 0,1,2, ···, M-2, M-1, and a ≠ b. .)
However, s is an integer.

(A is 0,1,2, ···, M-2, M -1, b is 0,1,2, ···, M-2, M-1, and a ≠ b. .)
However, u is an integer.

Good data reception quality can be obtained when the above two conditions are satisfied. In the eighth embodiment, <condition 42> may be satisfied.
In equations (242) and (247), when 0 radians ≤ δ <2π radians, a unitary matrix is obtained when δ = π radians, and a non-unitary matrix is obtained when δ ≠ π radians. In this method, a non-unitary matrix of π / 2 radians ≤ | δ | <π radians is one characteristic configuration, and good data reception quality can be obtained. As another configuration, there is a case of a unitary matrix, which will be described in detail in the tenth and 16th embodiments. When N is an odd number in the equations (242) to (247), good data reception is performed. The chances of getting quality are high.

(Embodiment 14)
In the present embodiment, an example of properly using a unitary matrix and a non-unitary matrix as the precoding matrix in the method of regularly switching the precoding matrix will be described.

For example, when using a 2-by-2 precoding matrix (each element is assumed to be composed of complex numbers), that is, two modulation signals based on a certain modulation scheme (s1 (t) and s2 (t). A case where precoding is applied to)) and two signals after precoding are transmitted from two antennas will be described.

When data is transmitted using the method of regularly switching the precoding matrix, the transmitting device of FIG. 13 of FIG. 3 uses the frame configuration signal 313 to transmit the mapping units 306A and 30.
6B switches the modulation method. At this time, the relationship between the number of modulation multi-values of the modulation method (the number of modulation multi-values: the number of signal points of the modulation method in the IQ plane) and the precoding matrix will be described.

The advantage of the method of regularly switching the precoding matrix is that good data reception quality can be obtained in the LOS environment as described in the sixth embodiment, and in particular, the receiving device can perform ML calculation or ML. When APP (or Max-log APP) based on calculation is applied, the effect is large. By the way, the ML calculation has a great influence on the circuit scale (calculation scale) with the number of modulation multi-values of the modulation method. For example, when two signals after precoding are transmitted from two antennas and two modulation signals (signals based on the modulation method before precoding) both use the same modulation method, the modulation method When is QPSK, the number of candidate signal points (received signal points 1101 in FIG. 11) in the IQ plane is 4 × 4 = 16, 16 × 16 = 256 for 16QAM, 64 × 64 = 4096 for 64QAM, In the case of 256QAM, it is 256 × 256 = 65536, and in the case of 1024QAM, it is 1024 × 1024 = 1048576. In the device, ML operation ((Max-log) APP based on ML operation) is used, and in the case of 256QAM and 1024QAM, detection using linear operation such as MMSE and ZF is used. (In some cases, in the case of 256QAM, ML operation may be used.)
Assuming such a receiving device, when considering the SNR (signal-to-noise power ratio) after multiple signal separation, if the receiving device uses linear operations such as MMSE and ZF, precoding When a unitary matrix is suitable as a matrix and ML operation is used, either a unitary matrix or a non-unitary matrix may be used as the precoding matrix. Considering the description of any of the above embodiments, the two signals after precoding are transmitted from the two antennas, and the two modulation signals (signals based on the modulation method before precoding) are both the same modulation. When the method is used, when the number of modulation multi-values of the modulation method is 64 values or less (or 256 values or less), it is not used as the precoding matrix when the method of regularly switching the precoding matrix is used. If the unitary matrix is used and is larger than 64 values (or 256 values), the unitary matrix is used in all the modulation methods supported by the communication system, and in any modulation method, the circuit scale of the receiving device. There is a high possibility that the effect of being able to obtain good data reception quality can be obtained while reducing the value.

Further, even when the number of modulation multi-values of the modulation method is 64 values or less (or 256 values or less), it may be better to use a unitary matrix. Considering this, if the modulation method supports multiple modulation methods with 64 values or less (or 256 values or less), the supported multiple modulation methods with 64 values or less. It is important that there is a case where a non-unitary matrix is used as the precoding matrix when the method of regularly switching the precoding matrix by any of the above modulation methods is used.

In the above, as an example, the case where two precoded signals are transmitted from two antennas has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and N precoded signals are transmitted from N antennas. , N modulation signals (signals based on the modulation method before precoding) all use the same modulation method, _{a threshold of β N} is set for the number of modulation multi-values of the modulation method, and the modulation method If multiple modulation methods with a multi-valued number of β _N or less are supported, the method of regularly switching the precoding matrix with one of _{the supported modulation methods of β N or less is used.} In some cases, a non-unitary matrix is used as the precoding matrix when used, and in the case of a modulation method in which the number of modulation multi-values of the _{modulation method is larger than β N} , the unitary matrix is used for all the support of the communication system. In any modulation method, there is a high possibility that the effect of obtaining good data reception quality while reducing the circuit scale of the receiving device can be obtained. (When the number of modulation multi-values of the modulation method is β _N or less, a non-unitary matrix may always be used as the precoding matrix when the method of regularly switching the precoding matrix is used.)
In the above, the case where the same modulation method is used for the modulation methods of the N modulation signals transmitted at the same time has been described, but in the following, two or more types of modulation methods are used for the N modulation signals transmitted at the same time. The case where it exists will be described.

As an example, a case where two signals after precoding are transmitted from two antennas will be described. Assuming that the two modulation signals (signals based on the modulation method before precoding) are the same modulation method or different modulation methods, the modulation method having a modulation multi-value number of ^2a1 and the modulation multi-value It is assumed that a modulation method in which the number is ^{2a2 is used.} At this time, when the ML calculation ((Max-log) APP based on the ML calculation) is used in the receiving device, the number of candidate signal points (received signal points 1101 in FIG. 11) in the IQ plane is 2 ^a1 × 2 ^a2. = 2 There are candidate signal points of ^{a1 + a2.} At this time, as described above, in order to be able to obtain reception quality of good data while reducing the circuit scale of the receiving apparatus, the threshold of relative ^{2 a1 + a2} 2 β provided, ^{2 a1 + a2} ≦ 2 β At this time, it is preferable to use a non-unitary matrix as the precoding matrix when the method of regularly switching the precoding matrix is used, and when 2 ^{a1 + a2} > 2 ^β , the unitary matrix should be used.

Further ^{, even in the case of 2 a1 + a2} ≤ 2 ^β , it may be better to use the unitary matrix. In view of such fact, 2 ^{a1 + a2} ≦ 2 if it supports a combination of a plurality of modulation schemes ^beta, a combination of a plurality of modulation schemes 2 ^{a1 + a2} ≦ 2 ^β supporting either modulation method It is important that there is a case where a non-unitary matrix is used as the precoding matrix when the method of regularly switching the precoding matrix by the combination is used.

In the above, as an example, the case where the two signals after precoding are transmitted from the two antennas has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when all N modulation signals (signals based on the modulation method before precoding) have the same modulation method or different modulation methods, the modulation multi-value of the modulation method of the i-th modulation signal Let the number be 2 ^ai (i = 1, 2, ..., N-1, N).

At this time, when the ML calculation ((Max-log) APP based on the ML calculation) is used in the receiving device, the number of candidate signal points (received signal points 1101 in FIG. 11) in the IQ plane is 2 ^a1 × 2 ^a2. × ・ ・ ・ × 2 ^ai × ・ ・ ・ × 2 ^aN = 2 ^{a1 + a2 + ・ ・ ・ + ai + ・ ・ ・ + aN} candidate signal points exist. At this time, as described above, in order to obtain good data reception quality while reducing the circuit scale of the receiving device, a threshold value of ^{2 β} with respect to 2 ^{a1 + a2 + ... + ai + ... + aN} Set up,

When a combination of a plurality of modulation methods satisfying <Condition # 44> is supported, a combination of a plurality of modulation methods satisfying the supported <Condition # 44> is regularly preliminarily used. There are cases where a non-unitary matrix is used as the precoding matrix when the method of switching the coding matrix is used.

In the case of all the combinations of modulation methods that satisfy <Condition # 45>, if a unitary matrix is used, the circuit scale of the receiving device is used in all the modulation methods supported by the communication system, regardless of the combination of the modulation methods. There is a high possibility that the effect of being able to obtain good data reception quality can be obtained while reducing the value. (A non-unitary matrix may be used as the precoding matrix when the method of regularly switching the precoding matrix is used in all combinations of a plurality of modulation methods that satisfy the supported <condition # 44>.)
(Embodiment 15)
In this embodiment, a system example of a method of regularly switching precoding matrices using a multi-carrier transmission method such as OFDM will be described.

FIG. 47 shows the time-frequency of the transmission signal transmitted by the broadcasting station (base station) in the system of the system of regularly switching the precoding matrix using the multi-carrier transmission method such as OFDM in the present embodiment. An example of the frame configuration on the axis is shown. (The frame configuration is from time $ 1 to time $ T.) FIG. 47 (A) is a frame configuration on the time-frequency axis of the stream s1 described in the first embodiment and the like, and FIG. 47 (B) is an embodiment. The frame configuration on the time-frequency axis of the stream s2 described in the first embodiment and the like is shown. The symbols of the same time and the same (sub) carrier of the stream s1 and the stream s2 will be transmitted at the same time and the same frequency by using a plurality of antennas.

In FIGS. 47 (A) and 47 (B), the (sub) carriers used when OFDM is used are carrier group #A and (sub) carrier b composed of (sub) carrier a to (sub) carrier a + Na. Carrier group #B composed of (sub) carrier b + Nb, carrier group #C composed of (sub) carrier c ~ (sub) carrier c + Nc, and (sub) carrier d ~ (sub) carrier d + Nd. It shall be divided by carrier group # D, .... Then, each subcarrier group shall support a plurality of transmission methods. Here, by supporting a plurality of transmission methods, it is possible to effectively utilize the advantages of each transmission method. For example, in FIGS. 47A and 47B, it is assumed that the carrier group #A uses a spatial multiplex MIMO transmission method or a MIMO transmission method in which the precoding matrix is fixed, and the carrier group #B is regularly precoded. It is assumed that the MIMO transmission method for switching the matrix is used, the carrier group #C transmits only the stream s1, and the carrier group #D transmits using the spatiotemporal block code.

FIG. 48 shows the time-frequency of the transmission signal transmitted by the broadcasting station (base station) in the system of the system of regularly switching the precoding matrix using the multi-carrier transmission system such as OFDM in the present embodiment. An example of the frame configuration on the axis is shown, and the frame configuration from the time $ X to the time $ X + T'at a time different from that of FIG. 47 is shown. In FIG. 48, similarly to FIG. 47, the (sub) carriers used when OFDM is used are the carrier group #A composed of (sub) carriers a to (sub) carriers a + Na, and the (sub) carriers b. Carrier group #B composed of (sub) carrier b + Nb, carrier group #C composed of (sub) carrier c ~ (sub) carrier c + Nc, and (sub) carrier d ~ (sub) carrier d + Nd. It shall be divided by carrier group # D, .... The difference between FIG. 48 and FIG. 47 is that there is a carrier group in which the communication method used in FIG. 47 and the communication method used in FIG. 48 are different. In FIGS. 48 (A) and (B), the carrier group #A is assumed to be transmitted using a spatiotemporal block code, and the carrier group #B is assumed to use a MIMO transmission method in which the precoding matrix is regularly switched. , Carrier group #C shall use a MIMO transmission method that regularly switches the precoding matrix, and carrier group #D shall transmit only the stream s1.

Next, the supported transmission methods will be described.
FIG. 49 shows a signal processing method when a spatial multiplex MIMO transmission method or a MIMO transmission method having a fixed precoding matrix is used, and is numbered in the same manner as in FIG. The weighting synthesizer 600, which is a baseband signal according to a certain modulation method, inputs the streams s1 (t) (307A) and the streams s2 (t) (307B) and the information 315 regarding the weighting method, and after weighting, The modulated signals z1 (t) (309A) and the weighted modulated signals z2 (t) (309B) are output. Here, when the information 315 regarding the weighting method indicates the spatial multiplex MIMO transmission method, the signal processing of the method # 1 of FIG. 49 is performed. That is, the following processing is performed.

However, when a method of transmitting one modulated signal is supported, the equation (250) may be expressed as the equation (251) in terms of transmission power.

Then, when the information 315 regarding the weighting method indicates a MIMO transmission method in which the precoding matrix is fixed, for example, the signal processing of the method # 2 of FIG. 49 is performed. That is, the following processing is performed.

Here, θ11, θ12, λ, and δ are fixed values.
FIG. 50 shows the configuration of the modulated signal when the spatiotemporal block code is used. The spatiotemporal block coding unit (5002) of FIG. 50 receives a baseband signal based on a certain modulated signal as an input. For example, the space-time block coding unit (5002) inputs symbols s1, symbols s2, .... Then, as shown in FIG. 50, spatiotemporal block coding is performed, and z1 (5003A) is "s1 as symbol # 0", "-s2 ^* as symbol # 1", "s3 as symbol # 2", and "symbol # 3". As -s4 ^* "..., and z2 (5003B) becomes" symbol # 0 as s2 "," symbol # 1 as s1 ^* "," symbol # 2 as s4 "," symbol # 3 as s3 ^* "... Become. At this time, the symbol # X in z1 and the symbol # X in z2 are transmitted from the antenna at the same time and at the same frequency.

Although only the symbols for transmitting data are shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, it is actually necessary to transmit information such as a transmission method, a modulation method, and an error correction method. For example, as shown in FIG. 51, if these information are periodically transmitted by only one modulation signal z1, the information can be transmitted to the communication partner. In addition, it is necessary to transmit fluctuations in the transmission line, that is, symbols for the receiving device to estimate channel fluctuations (for example, pilot symbols, reference symbols, preambles, and known transmission / reception (PSK: Phase Shift Keying) symbols). .. Although these symbols are omitted in FIGS. 47 and 48, in reality, symbols for estimating channel fluctuations are included in the frame configuration on the time-frequency axis. Therefore, each carrier group is not composed only of symbols for transmitting data. (This point is the same in the first embodiment.)
FIG. 52 shows an example of the configuration of the transmission device of the broadcasting station (base station) in the present embodiment. The transmission method determination unit (5205) determines the number of carriers in each carrier group, the modulation method, the error correction method, the coding rate of the error correction code, the transmission method, and the like, and outputs the control signal (5205).

The modulation signal generation unit # 1 (5201_1) receives information (5200_1) and a control signal (5205) as inputs, and modulates the carrier group #A of FIGS. 47 and 48 based on the information of the communication method of the control signal (5205). The signal z1 (5202_1) and the modulated signal z2 (5203_1) are output.

Similarly, the modulation signal generation unit # 2 (5201_2) receives the information (5200_2) and the control signal (5205) as inputs, and based on the information of the communication method of the control signal (5205), the carrier group # of FIGS. 47 and 48 # The modulation signal z1 (5202_2) and the modulation signal z2 (5203_2) of B are output.

Similarly, the modulation signal generation unit # 3 (5201_3) receives the information (5200_3) and the control signal (5205) as inputs, and based on the information of the communication method of the control signal (5205), the carrier group # of FIGS. 47 and 48. The modulation signal z1 (5202_3) and the modulation signal z2 (5203_3) of C are output.

Similarly, the modulation signal generation unit # 4 (5201_4) takes the information (5200_4) and the control signal (5205) as inputs, and based on the information of the communication method of the control signal (5205), the carrier group # of FIGS. 47 and 48. The modulation signal z1 (5202_4) and the modulation signal z2 (5203_4) of D are output.

・
・
・
Similarly, the modulation signal generation unit #M (5201_M) receives information (5200_M) and control signal (5205) as inputs, and based on the information of the communication method of the control signal (5205), the modulation signal z1 (5202_M) of a certain carrier group. ) And the modulation signal z2 (5203_M) are output.

The OFDM system related processing unit (5207_1) includes the modulation signal z1 (5202_1) of the carrier group #A, the modulation signal z1 (5202_1) of the carrier group #B, the modulation signal z1 (5202_1) of the carrier group #C, and the carrier group #D. Modulation signal z1 (5202_4), ..., Modulation signal z1 (5202_M) of a certain carrier group, and control signal (5206) are used as inputs, and processing such as rearrangement, inverse Fourier conversion, frequency conversion, and amplification is performed. , The transmission signal (5208_1) is output, and the transmission signal (5208_1) is output as a radio wave from the antenna (5209_1).

Similarly, the OFDM system related processing unit (5207_2) includes the modulation signal z1 (5203_1) of the carrier group #A, the modulation signal z2 (5203_2) of the carrier group #B, the modulation signal z2 (5203_3) of the carrier group #C, and the carrier. Modulation signal z2 (5203_4) of group #D, ..., Modulation signal z2 (5203_M) of a certain carrier group, and control signal (5206) are used as inputs, and rearrangement, inverse Fourier conversion, frequency conversion, amplification, etc. are performed. After processing, the transmission signal (5208_2) is output, and the transmission signal (5208_2) is output as a radio wave from the antenna (5209_2).

FIG. 53 shows an example of the configuration of the modulation signal generation units # 1 to # M of FIG. 52. The error correction coding unit (5302) receives information (5300) and a control signal (5301) as inputs, and sets an error correction coding method and an error correction coding coding rate according to the control signal (5301). , Error correction coding is performed, and data (5303) after error correction coding is output. (By setting the error correction coding method and the code rate of the error correction coding, for example, when an LDPC code, a turbo code, a convolutional code, etc. are used, puncture is performed depending on the code rate to realize the code rate. May be done.)
The interleaving unit (5304) receives the data (5303) and the control signal (5301) after the error correction coding as inputs, and follows the information of the interleaving method included in the control signal (5301), and the data (5303) after the error correction coding. ) Is rearranged, and the interleaved data (5305) is output.

The mapping unit (5306_1) receives the interleaved data (5305) and the control signal (5301) as inputs, performs mapping processing according to the information of the modulation method included in the control signal (5301), and outputs the baseband signal (5307_1). Output.

Similarly, the mapping unit (5306_2) takes the interleaved data (5305) and the control signal (5301) as inputs, performs mapping processing according to the information of the modulation method included in the control signal (5301), and performs the mapping process to the baseband signal (5301). 5307_2) is output.

The signal processing unit (5308) inputs the baseband signal (5307_1), the baseband signal (5307_2), and the control signal (5301), and the transmission method included in the control signal (5301) (here, for example, spatial multiplexing MIMO). Signal processing is performed based on the information of the transmission method, the MIMO method using a fixed precoding matrix, the MIMO method that switches the precoding matrix regularly, the spatiotemporal block coding, and the transmission method that transmits only the stream s1). The processed signal z1 (5309_1) and the processed signal z2 (5309_2) are output. When the transmission method for transmitting only the stream s1 is selected, the signal processing unit (5308) may not output the z2 (5309_2) after the signal processing. Further, FIG. 53 shows a configuration in which there is only one error correction coding unit, but the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, as shown in FIG. 3, a plurality of encoders may be provided. ..

FIG. 54 shows an example of the configuration of the OFDM system-related processing units (5207_1 and 5207_2) in FIG. 52, and those operating in the same manner as in FIG. 14 are designated by the same reference numerals. The rearrangement unit (5402A) is a modulation signal z1 (5400_1) of the carrier group #A, a modulation signal z1 (5400_2) of the carrier group #B, a modulation signal z1 (5400_3) of the carrier group #C, and a modulation of the carrier group #D. Signal z1 (5400_4), ..., Modulation signal z1 (5400_M) of a certain carrier group, and control signal (5403) are used as inputs, and sorting is performed, and the sorted signals 1405A and 1405B are output. In addition, in FIG. 47, FIG. 48, and FIG. Carrier groups may be formed. Further, in FIGS. 47, 48, and 51, the number of carriers in the carrier group is described by an example in which the number of carriers does not change with time, but the present invention is not limited to this. This point will be described later separately.

FIG. 55 shows an example of the details of the frame configuration on the time-frequency axis of the method of setting the transmission method for each carrier group as shown in FIGS. 47, 48, and 51. In FIG. 55, the control information symbol is shown by 5500, the individual control information symbol is shown by 5501, the data symbol is shown by 5502, and the pilot symbol is shown by 5503. Further, FIG. 55 (A) shows the frame configuration on the time-frequency axis of the stream s1, and FIG. 55 (B) shows the frame configuration on the time-frequency axis of the stream s2.

The control information symbol is a symbol for transmitting control information common to the carrier group, and is composed of a symbol for the transceiver to perform frequency and time synchronization, information on (sub) carrier allocation, and the like. Then, it is assumed that the control control symbol is transmitted only from the stream s1 at the time $ 1.

The individual control information symbol is a symbol for transmitting control information of each subcarrier group, and is a transmission method, a modulation method, an error correction coding method, an error correction coding coding rate, and an error correction code of the data symbol. It is composed of information such as the block size of the above, information on how to insert the pilot symbol, and information on the transmission power of the pilot symbol. It is assumed that the individual control information symbol is transmitted only from the stream s1 at time $ 1.

A data symbol is a symbol for transmitting data (information), and as described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50, for example, a spatial multiplex MIMO transmission method, a MIMO method using a fixed precoding matrix, and a rule. It is a symbol of any of the MIMO method for switching the precoding matrix, the spatiotemporal block coding, and the transmission method for transmitting only the stream s1. In the carrier group #A, the carrier group #B, the carrier group #C, and the carrier group #D, it is described that the data symbol exists in the stream s2, but a transmission method in which only the stream s1 is transmitted is used. In that case, the data symbol may not exist in the stream s2.

The pilot symbol is a symbol for the receiving device to estimate the channel, that is, the variation corresponding to h11 (t), h12 (t), h21 (t), h22 (t) of the equation (36). (Here, since a multi-carrier transmission method such as the OFDM method is used, in order to estimate fluctuations corresponding to h11 (t), h12 (t), h21 (t), and h22 (t) for each subcarrier. Therefore, the pilot symbol uses, for example, a PSK transmission method, and is configured to have a pattern known to the transceiver. The pilot symbol may also be used by the receiver for frequency offset estimation, phase distortion estimation, and time synchronization.

FIG. 56 shows an example of the configuration of the receiving device for receiving the modulated signal transmitted by the transmitting device of FIG. 52, and the same reference numerals are given to those operating in the same manner as in FIG.
In FIG. 56, the OFDM system-related processing unit (5600_X) receives the received signal 702_X as an input, performs predetermined processing, and outputs the signal 704_X after the signal processing. Similarly, the OFDM system related processing unit (5600_Y) receives the received signal 702_Y as an input, performs predetermined processing, and outputs the signal 704_Y after the signal processing.

The control information decoding unit 709 of FIG. 56 receives the signal 704_X after signal processing and the signal 704_Y after signal processing as inputs, extracts the control information symbol and the individual control information symbol in FIG. 55, and transmits the control information by these symbols. Is obtained, and a control signal 710 including this information is output.

The channel variation estimation unit 705_1 of the modulated signal z1 receives the signal 704_X after signal processing and the control signal 710 as inputs, performs channel estimation in the carrier group (desired carrier group) required by this receiving device, and performs channel estimation. The signal 706_1 is output.

Similarly, the channel variation estimation unit 705_2 of the modulated signal z2 takes the signal 704_X after signal processing and the control signal 710 as inputs, and performs channel estimation in the carrier group (desired carrier group) required by this receiving device. , Outputs the channel estimation signal 706_2.

Similarly, the channel variation estimation unit 705_1 of the modulated signal z1 receives the signal 704_Y after signal processing and the control signal 710 as inputs, and performs channel estimation in the carrier group (desired carrier group) required by this receiving device. , Outputs the channel estimation signal 708_1.

Similarly, the channel variation estimation unit 705_2 of the modulated signal z2 takes the signal 704_Y after signal processing and the control signal 710 as inputs, and performs channel estimation in the carrier group (desired carrier group) required by this receiving device. , Outputs the channel estimation signal 708_2.

Then, the signal processing unit 711 receives the signals 706_1, 706_2, 708_1, 708_2, 704_X, 704_Y, and the control signal 710 as inputs, and transmits the data symbols included in the control signal 710 and transmitted by the desired carrier group. Demodulation and decoding are performed based on information such as the method, modulation method, error correction coding method, error correction coding coding rate, and error correction code block size, and the received data 712 is output.

FIG. 57 shows the configuration of the OFDM method-related processing unit (5600_X, 5600_Y) in FIG. 56, and the frequency conversion unit (5701) receives the received signal (5700) as an input, performs frequency conversion, and after frequency conversion. The signal (5702) is output.

The Fourier transform unit (5703) takes the signal (5702) after the frequency conversion as an input, performs the Fourier transform, and outputs the signal (5704) after the Fourier transform.
As described above, when a multi-carrier transmission system such as the OFDM system is used, by dividing into a plurality of carrier groups and setting the transmission system for each carrier group, reception quality and transmission can be achieved for each carrier group. Since the speed can be set, the effect of being able to build a flexible system can be obtained. At this time, by making it possible to select a method of regularly switching the precoding matrix as described in another embodiment, high reception quality can be obtained and a high transmission speed can be obtained for the LOS environment. Can be obtained, which is an advantage. In the present embodiment, as the transmission method in which the carrier group can be set, "spatial multiplex MIMO transmission method, MIMO method using a fixed precoding matrix, MIMO method for regularly switching the precoding matrix, spatiotemporal block". "Transmission method for encoding and transmitting only stream s1" was mentioned, but it is not limited to this. At this time, the method of FIG. 50 was described as a spatiotemporal code, but it is not limited to this, and is fixed. The MIMO method using a typical precoding matrix is not limited to the method # 2 of FIG. 49, and may be composed of a fixed precoding matrix. Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the number of antennas of the transmitting device is 2 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the number of antennas is larger than 2, "spatial multiplex MIMO transmission method, fixed" is used for each carrier group. The same effect can be achieved by making it possible to select one of the transmission methods: MIMO method using precoding matrix, MIMO method that switches precoding matrix regularly, spatiotemporal block coding, and transmission method that transmits only stream s1. Obtainable.

FIG. 58 shows a carrier group allocation method different from that of FIGS. 47, 48, and 51. In FIGS. 47, 48, 51, and 55, the allocation of the carrier group is described by an example of configuring the aggregated subcarriers, but in FIG. 58, the carriers of the carrier group are arranged discretely. Is a feature. FIG. 58 shows an example of a frame configuration on the time-frequency axis, which is different from FIGS. 47, 48, 51, and 55. In FIG. 58, carrier 1 to carrier H and time $ 1 to time $ K are shown. The frame configuration of the above is shown, and the same reference numerals are given to those similar to those shown in FIG. 55. In the data symbol of FIG. 58, the symbol described as "A" is the symbol of the carrier group A, the symbol described as "B" is the symbol of the carrier group B, and described as "C". The symbol shown is a symbol of the carrier group C, and the symbol described as "D" is a symbol of the carrier group D. As described above, the carrier group can be similarly implemented even if they are arranged discretely in the (sub) carrier direction, and it is not always necessary to use the same carrier in the time axis direction. By performing such an arrangement, it is possible to obtain the effect that the time and frequency diversity gain can be obtained.

In FIGS. 47, 48, 51, and 58, the control information symbol and the unique control information symbol are arranged at the same time for each carrier group, but they may be arranged at different times. Further, the number of (sub) carriers used by the carrier group may be changed over time.

(Embodiment 16)
In the present embodiment, as in the case of the tenth embodiment, a method of regularly switching the precoding matrix using the unitary matrix will be described when N is an odd number.

In the method of regularly switching the precoding matrix with period 2N, the precoding matrix prepared for period 2N is expressed by the following equation.

It is assumed that α> 0 and that it is a fixed value (regardless of i).

It is assumed that α> 0 and that it is a fixed value (regardless of i). (It is assumed that α in equation (253) and α in equation (254) have the same value.)
At this time, from the condition 5 of (Equation 106) and the condition 6 of (Equation 107) of the third embodiment, the following conditions are satisfied with respect to the equation (253) in order to obtain good data reception quality. It becomes important.

(X is 0,1,2, ···, N-2, N-1, y is 0,1,2, ···, N-2, N-1, and x ≠ y. .)

(X is 0,1,2, ···, N-2, N-1, y is 0,1,2, ···, N-2, N-1, and x ≠ y. .)

Then, consider adding the following conditions.

Next, as described in the sixth embodiment, <condition # 49> or <condition # 50> is set in order to arrange the reception inferior points on the complex plane so as to have a uniform distribution with respect to the phase. give.

That is, in <condition 49>, it means that the phase difference is 2π / N radians.
Further, in <condition 50>, it means that the phase difference is -2π / N radians.
Then, when θ ₁₁ (0) −θ ₂₁ (0) = 0 radians and α> 1, the reception inferior point of s1 and the reception inferior point of s2 at N = 3 on the complex plane. Arrangement is shown in FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b).
Shown in. As can be seen from FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b), in the complex plane, the minimum distance of the poor reception point of s1 is kept large, and similarly, the minimum distance of the poor reception point of s2 is also kept large. There is. Then, the same state is obtained when α <1. Further, as compared with FIG. 45 of the tenth embodiment, when considered in the same manner as the ninth embodiment, the distance between the reception inferior points in the complex plane is higher when N is an odd number than when N is an even number. Is likely to increase. However, when N is a small value, for example, N ≦ 16 or less, the minimum distance of the reception inferior points in the complex plane can be secured to some extent because the number of reception inferior points existing is small. Therefore, when N ≦ 16, there may be a case where the data reception quality can be ensured even if the number is even.

Therefore, in the method of regularly switching the precoding matrix based on the equations (253) and (254), if N is an odd number, it is highly possible that the data reception quality can be improved. The precoding matrix of F [0] to F [2N-1] is generated based on the equations (253) and (254) (precoding matrix of F [0] to F [2N-1]). Can be used in any order for a period of 2N.) Then, for example, precoding is performed using F [0] when the symbol number is 2Ni, precoding is performed using F [1] when the symbol number is 2Ni + 1, and ..., F when the symbol number is 2N × i + h. Precoding is performed using [h] (h = 0, 1, 2, ..., 2N-2, 2N-1). (Here, as described in the previous embodiment, the precoding matrix does not necessarily have to be switched regularly.) Further, when the modulation methods of s1 and s2 are both 16QAM, α is expressed by the equation (233). ), It may be possible to obtain the effect that the minimum distance between 16 × 16 = 256 signal points in the IQ plane can be increased in a specific LOS environment.

Further, the following conditions are considered as conditions different from <Condition # 48>.

(X is N, N + 1, N + 2, ..., 2N-2,2N-1 and y is N, N + 1, N + 2, ..., 2N-2,2N-1 And x ≠ y.)

(X is N, N + 1, N + 2, ..., 2N-2,2N-1 and y is N, N + 1, N + 2, ..., 2N-2,2N-1 And x ≠ y.)
At this time, by satisfying <condition # 46>, <condition # 47>, <condition # 51>, and <condition # 52>, the distance between the reception inferior points between s1s in the complex plane can be increased, and the distance between s2s can be increased. Since the distance between the reception inferior points can be increased, good data reception quality can be obtained.

In this embodiment, a method of constructing 2N different precoding matrices for a precoding hopping method having a time period of 2N has been described. At this time, F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [2N-2], F [2N-1] are prepared as 2N different precoding matrices. However, since this embodiment is described by taking the case of the single carrier transmission method as an example, F [0], F [1], F [2], ... , F [2N-2], F [2N-1] have been described in this order, but the present invention is not limited to this, and 2N different precoding matrices F [0] generated in the present embodiment have been described. , F [1], F [2], ..., F [2N-2], F [2N-1] can also be applied to multi-carrier transmission methods such as OFDM transmission methods. As for the application method in this case, the precoding weight can be changed by arranging the symbols on the frequency axis and the frequency-time axis as in the first embodiment. Although it is described as a precoding hopping method with a time period of 2N, the same effect can be obtained by randomly using 2N different precoding matrices, that is, a regular period is not always used. You don't have to use 2N different precoding matrices to have.

Further, in the precoding matrix switching method of period H (where H is a method in which the precoding matrix is regularly switched and the period 2N is a larger natural number), 2N different precoding matrices in the present embodiment are included. If it is, there is a high possibility that good reception quality will be given.

(Embodiment A1)
In the present embodiment, the transmission method for regularly switching the precoding matrix described so far is DVB (Digital Video Broadcasting) -T2 (T: Terrestrial).
) The method of applying to the communication system using the standard will be described in detail.

FIG. 61 shows an outline of the frame configuration of the signal transmitted by the broadcasting station in the DVB-T2 standard. Since the DVB-T2 standard uses the OFDM method, a frame is configured on the time-frequency axis. FIG. 61 shows the frame configuration on the time-frequency axis, and the frames are P1 Signaling data (6101), L1 Pre-Signalling data (6102), L1 Post-Signalling data (6103), Common PLP (6104), and It is composed of PLP # 1 to #N (6105-1 to 6105_N) (PLP: Physical Layer Pipe). (Here, L1 Pre-Signalling data (6102) and L1 Post-Signalling data (6103) are P2.
Called a symbol. ) Thus, it is composed of P1 Signaling data (6101), L1 Pre-Signalling data (6102), L1 Post-Signalling data (6103), Common PLP (6104), PLP # 1 to #N (6105-1 to 6105_N). The frame is named T2 frame, which is one unit of the frame configuration.

P1 Signaling data (6101) is a symbol for the receiving device to perform signal detection and frequency synchronization (including frequency offset estimation), and at the same time, FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) size information in the frame, SISO (Single-). Information such as which method of input single-output) / MISO (Multiple-Input Single-Output) is used to transmit the modulated signal is transmitted. (In the case of the SISO method, it is a method of transmitting one modulated signal, and in the case of the MISO method, it is a method of transmitting a plurality of modulated signals, and a spatiotemporal block code is used.)
Based on L1 Pre-Signalling data (6102), information on the guard interval used in the transmission frame, information on the PAPR (Peak to Average Power Ratio) method, modulation method when transmitting L1 Post-Signalling data, and error correction method ( FEC: Forward Error Correction), error correction method coding rate information, L1 Post-Signalling data size and information size information, pilot pattern information, cell (frequency area) unique number information, normal mode and extended mode (The number of subcarriers used for data transmission differs between the normal mode and the extended mode.) Information on which method is used is transmitted.

Based on L1 Post-Signalling data (6103), information on the number of PLPs, information on the frequency region used, information on the unique number of each PLP, modulation method, error correction method, and error correction method used to transmit each PLP. Information on the coding rate of, information on the number of blocks to be transmitted by each PLP, and the like are transmitted.

Common PLP (6104) and PLP # 1 to #N (6105-1 to 6105_N) are areas for transmitting data.
In the frame configuration of FIG. 61, P1 Signaling data (6101), L1 Pre-Signalling data (6102), L1 Post-Signalling data (6103), Common PLP (6104), PLP # 1 to #N (6105-1 to 6105_N) are Although it is described as being transmitted in time division, in reality, two or more types of signals exist at the same time. An example thereof is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 62, L1 Pre-Signalling data, L1 Post-Signalling data, and Common PLP may exist at the same time, or PLP # 1 and PLP # 2 may exist at the same time. .. in short,
Each signal uses time division and frequency division in combination to form a frame.

FIG. 63 shows an example of the configuration of a transmission device to which the transmission method of regularly switching the precoding matrix described above is applied to the transmission device of the DVB-T2 standard (for example, a broadcasting station). .. The PLP signal generation unit 6302 receives the transmission data 6301 for PLP (data for a plurality of PLPs) and the control signal 6309 as inputs, and includes error correction coding information of each PLP included in the control signal 6309, modulation method information, and the like. Based on the information, error correction coding and mapping based on the modulation method are performed, and the (orthogonal) baseband signal 6303 of the PLP is output.

The P2 symbol signal generation unit 6305 receives the transmission data 6304 for the P2 symbol and the control signal 6309 as inputs, and performs error correction coding based on information such as error correction information of the P2 symbol and modulation method information included in the control signal 6309. , Mapping is performed based on the modulation method, and the (orthogonal) baseband signal 6306 of the P2 symbol is output.

The control signal generation unit 6308 receives the transmission data 6307 for the P1 symbol and the transmission data 6304 for the P2 symbol as inputs, and each symbol group (P1 Signaling data (6101), L1 Pre-Signalling data (6102), L1 Post) in FIG. -Signalling data (6103)
, Common PLP (6104), PLP # 1 to #N (6105-1 to 6105_N)) transmission method (
Error correction code, error correction code coding rate, modulation method, block length, frame configuration, selected transmission method including transmission method that switches the precoding matrix regularly, pilot symbol insertion method, IFFT (Inverse Fast Fourier Transform) / FFT information, PAPR reduction method information, guard interval insertion method information) information is output as a control signal 6309.

The frame configuration unit 6310 receives the PLP baseband signal 6312, the P2 symbol baseband signal 6306, and the control signal 6309 as inputs, and sorts them on the frequency and time axes based on the frame configuration information included in the control signals. According to the frame structure,
The (orthogonal) baseband signal 6311_1 of the stream 1 and the (orthogonal) baseband signal 6311_2 of the stream 2 are output.

The signal processing unit 6312 receives the baseband signal 6311_1 of the stream 1, the baseband signal 6311_2 of the stream 2, and the control signal 6309 as inputs, and the modulated signal 1 (6313_1) after signal processing based on the transmission method included in the control signal 6309. And the modulated signal 2 (6313_2) after signal processing is output. The characteristic point here is that when a transmission method for regularly switching the precoding matrix is selected as the transmission method, the signal processing unit regularly performs the same as in FIGS. 6, 22, 23, and 26. The precoding matrix is switched to, and weighted synthesis (precoding) is performed, and the signals after precoding become the modulated signal 1 (6313_1) after signal processing and the modulated signal 2 (6313_2) after signal processing.

The pilot insertion unit 6314_1 receives the modulated signal 1 (6313_1) after signal processing and the control signal 6309 as inputs, and based on the information on the method of inserting the pilot symbol included in the control signal 6309, the modulated signal 1 (6313_1) after signal processing. The pilot symbol is inserted into, and the modulation signal 6315_1 after the insertion of the pilot symbol is output.

The pilot insertion unit 6314_2 takes the modulated signal 2 (6313_2) after signal processing and the control signal 6309 as inputs, and based on the information on the method of inserting the pilot symbol included in the control signal 6309, the modulated signal 2 (6313_2) after signal processing. The pilot symbol is inserted into, and the modulation signal 6315_2 after the insertion of the pilot symbol is output.

The IFFT (Inverse Fast Fourier Transform) unit 6316_1 takes the modulation signal 6315_1 and the control signal 6309 after inserting the pilot symbol as inputs, performs IFFT based on the information of the IFFT method included in the control signal 6309, and performs the IFFT, and the signal 6317_1 after the IFFT. Is output.

The IFFT unit 6316_2 takes the modulated signal 6315_2 and the control signal 6309 after inserting the pilot symbol as inputs, performs IFFT based on the information of the IFFT method included in the control signal 6309, and outputs the signal 6317_2 after the IFFT.

The PAPR reduction unit 6318_1 receives the signal 6317_1 after the IFFT and the control signal 6309 as inputs, and based on the information on the PAPR reduction contained in the control signal 6309, performs a process for reducing the PAPR on the signal 6317_1 after the IFFT, and after the PAPR is reduced. Signal 6319_1 is output.

The PAPR reduction unit 6318_2 takes the signal 6317_2 and the control signal 6309 after the IFFT as inputs, and based on the information on the PAPR reduction contained in the control signal 6309, performs the processing for reducing the PAPR on the signal 6317_2 after the IFFT, and after the PAPR is reduced. Signal 6319_2 is output.

The guard interval insertion unit 6320_1 inputs the signal 6319_1 and the control signal 6309 after the PAPR reduction, and inserts the guard interval into the signal 6319_1 after the PAPR reduction based on the information on the method of inserting the guard interval included in the control signal 6309. The signal 6321_1 after the guard interval is inserted is output.

The guard interval insertion unit 6320_2 receives the PAPR reduced signal 6319_2 and the control signal 6309 as inputs, and inserts the guard interval into the PAPR reduced signal 6319_2 based on the information on the guard interval insertion method included in the control signal 6309. The signal 6321_2 after the guard interval is inserted is output.

The P1 symbol insertion unit 6322 inputs the signal 6321_1 after the guard interval is inserted, the signal 6321_2 after the guard interval is inserted, and the transmission data 6307 for the P1 symbol, and generates the P1 symbol signal from the transmission data 6307 for the P1 symbol. A P1 symbol is added to the signal 6321_1 after the guard interval is inserted, and a P1 symbol is added to the signal 6323_1 after the processing for the P1 symbol and the signal 6321_2 after the insertion of the guard interval, and the signal after the processing for the P1 symbol is added. Outputs 6323_2. The signal of the P1 symbol may be added to both the signal 6323_1 after the processing for the P1 symbol and the signal 6323_2 after the processing for the P1 symbol, or may be added to either of them. When it is added to one side, in the section where the added signal is added, a zero signal exists as a baseband signal in the non-added signal.

The radio processing unit 6324_1 receives the signal 6323_1 after processing for the P1 symbol as an input, performs processing such as frequency conversion and amplification, and outputs a transmission signal 6325_1. Then, the transmission signal 6325_1 is output as a radio wave from the antenna 6326_1.

The radio processing unit 6324_2 receives the signal 6323_2 after processing for the P1 symbol as an input, performs processing such as frequency conversion and amplification, and outputs a transmission signal 6325_2. Then, the transmission signal 6325_2 is output as a radio wave from the antenna 6326_2.

Next, the frame configuration and control information of the transmission signal of the broadcasting station (base station) when the method of regularly switching the precoding matrix is applied to the DVB-T2 system (information transmitted by the P1 symbol and the P2 symbol). The transmission method of the above will be described in detail.

FIG. 64 shows an example of the frame configuration on the frequency-time axis when a plurality of PLPs are transmitted after transmitting the P1 symbol, the P2 symbol, and the Common PLP. In FIG. 64, the stream s1 uses subcarriers # 1 to subcarrier # M on the frequency axis, and similarly, the stream s2 uses subcarriers # 1 to subcarrier # M on the frequency axis. Therefore, if the symbols exist at the same time of the same subcarrier in both s1 and s2, the symbols of the two streams exist at the same frequency. As described in other embodiments, when precoding including a precoding method for regularly switching the precoding matrix is performed, s1 and s2 are weighted by using the precoding matrix, and Synthesis is performed, and z1 and z2 are output from the antenna, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 64, the section 1 transmits the symbol group 6401 of PLP # 1 using the streams s1 and s2, and the spatial multiplex MIMO transmission method or the precoding matrix shown in FIG. 49 is used. Data shall be transmitted using a fixed MIMO transmission method.
In the section 2, the symbol group 6402 of PLP # 2 is transmitted using the stream s1, and data is transmitted by transmitting one modulated signal.

In section 3, streams s1 and streams s2 are used to transmit the symbol group 6403 of PLP # 3, and data is transmitted using a precoding method in which the precoding matrix is regularly switched.

In the section 4, stream s1 and stream s2 are used to transmit the symbol group 6404 of PLP # 4, and data is transmitted using the spatiotemporal block code shown in FIG. The symbol arrangement in the spatiotemporal block code is not limited to the time direction, and may be arranged in the frequency axis direction, or may be appropriately arranged in the symbol group formed in the time-frequency range. Further, the spatiotemporal block code is not limited to the method described with reference to FIG.

When the broadcasting station transmits each PLP as shown in FIG. 64, the receiving device that receives the transmission signal of FIG. 64 needs to know the transmission method of each PLP. Therefore, as described above, it is necessary to transmit the information of the transmission method of each PLP by using the P2 symbol L1 Post-Signalling data (6103 in FIG. 61). Hereinafter, an example of the method of constructing the P1 symbol and the method of constructing the P2 symbol at this time will be described.

Table 3 shows specific examples of control information transmitted using the P1 symbol.

In the DVB-T2 standard, whether or not the DVB-T2 standard is used based on the control information (3-bit information) of S1, and if the DVB-T2 standard is used, the receiving device determines the transmission method used. You can judge. When "000" is set as the 3-bit S1 information, the modulated signal to be transmitted conforms to "transmission of one modulated signal of the DVB-T2 standard".

Further, when "001" is set as the 3-bit S1 information, the modulated signal to be transmitted conforms to "transmission using the spatio-temporal block code of the DVB-T2 standard".
In the DVB-T2 standard, "010" to "111" are "Reserve" for the future. Here, in order to apply the present invention so as to be compatible with DVB-T2, for example, when "010" is set as the 3-bit S1 information (other than "000" and "001" may be used. ), It is decided that the modulated signal to be transmitted conforms to a standard other than DVB-T2, and when the receiving device of the terminal finds that this information is "010", the modulated signal transmitted by the broadcasting station is transmitted. It can be known that it conforms to a standard other than DVB-T2.

Next, an example of a method of configuring a P2 symbol when the modulated signal transmitted by the broadcasting station complies with a standard other than DVB-T2 will be described. In the first example, a method using the P2 symbol in the DVB-T2 standard will be described.

Table 4 shows a first example of control information transmitted by L1 Post-Signalling data among P2 symbols.

SISO: Single-Input Single-Output (transmitting one modulated signal, receiving with one antenna)
SIMO: Single-Input Multiple-Output (transmission of one modulated signal, reception by multiple antennas)
MISO: Multiple-Input Single-Output (Multiple modulation signals are transmitted by multiple antennas and received by one antenna)
MIMO: Multiple-Input Multiple-Output (Multiple modulation signals are transmitted by multiple antennas and received by multiple antennas)


As shown in FIG. 64, the 2-bit information "PLP_MODE" shown in Table 4 is control information for notifying the terminal of the transmission method of each PLP (PLPs # 1 to # 4 in FIG. 64). Yes, the information of PLP_MODE will exist for each PLP. That is, in the case of FIG. 64, the PLP_MODE information for PLP # 1, the PLP_MODE information for PLP # 2, the PLP_MODE information for PLP # 3, the PLP_MODE information for PLP # 4, and so on. , Will be transmitted from the broadcasting station. As a matter of course, the terminal can recognize the transmission method used by the broadcasting station for PLP by demodulating this information (and also performing error correction and decoding).

When "00" is set as "PLP_MODE", the PLP transmits data by "transmitting one modulated signal". When set to "01", the PLP transmits data by "transmitting a plurality of modulated signals subjected to spatiotemporal block coding". When set to "10", data is transmitted to the PLP using a "precoding method for regularly switching the precoding matrix". When "11" is set, data is transmitted to the PLP by using "a MIMO method in which the precoding matrix is fixed or a spatial multiplex MIMO transmission method".

When "PLP_MODE" is set to "01" to "11", what kind of processing is specifically performed by the broadcasting station (for example, specific switching in the method of regularly switching the precoding matrix). It is necessary to transmit the method, the spatiotemporal lock coding method used, and the configuration of the matrix used as the precoding matrix) to the terminal. A method of configuring control information different from that in Table 4, including the configuration of control information at this time, will be described below.

Table 5 is a second example of the P2 symbols, which is different from Table 4 of the control information transmitted by L1 Post-Signalling data.

As shown in Table 5, 1-bit information "PLP_MODE", 1-bit information "MIMO_MODE", 2-bit information "MIMO_PATTERN # 1", and 2-bit information "MIMO_PATTER # 2" are These four control information exist and are information for notifying the terminal of the transmission method of each PLP (PLP # 1 to # 4 in FIG. 64) as shown in FIG. 64, and therefore these four control information. The control information will exist for each PLP. That is, in the case of FIG. 64, PLP_MODE information / MIMO_MODE information for PLP # 1, MIMO_PATTERN # 1 information / MIMO_PATTER # 2, PLP_MODE information for PLP # 2, MIMO_MODE information / MIMO_PATTERN # 1 Information / Information of MIMO_PATTER # 2, PLP_MODE information for PLP # 3 / Information of MIMO_MODE / Information of MIMO_PATTERN # 1 / Information of MIMO_PATTER # 2, Information of PLP_MODE for PLP # 4 / Information of MIMO_MODERN / MIMO_PATTERN The information of # 1 / the information of MIMO_PATTER # 2 ... Will be transmitted from the broadcasting station. As a matter of course, the terminal can recognize the transmission method used by the broadcasting station for PLP by demodulating this information (and also performing error correction and decoding).

When "0" is set as "PLP_MODE", the PLP transmits data by "transmitting one modulated signal". When set to "1", the PLP is "transmitting multiple modulated signals with spatiotemporal block coding", "precoding method for regularly switching precoding matrices", and "fixed precoding matrix". Data is transmitted by either "Native MIMO method" or "Spatial multiplex MIMO transmission method".

When "PLP_MODE" is set to "1", the information of "MIMO_MODE" becomes valid information, and when "MIMO_MODE" is set to "0", the precoding method of regularly switching the precoding matrix is used. Without, the data is transmitted. When "1" is set as "MIMO_MODE", data is transmitted using a precoding method in which the precoding matrix is regularly switched.

When "PLP_MODE" is set to "1" and "MIMO_MODE" is set to "0", the information of "MIMO_PATTERN # 1" is valid information, and when "MIMO_PATTERN # 1" is set to "00", the hour Data is transmitted using spatial block code. When "01" is set, the data is transmitted by using the precoding method in which the precoding matrix # 1 is fixedly used for weighting synthesis. When "10" is set, the data is transmitted by using the precoding method in which the precoding matrix # 2 is fixedly used for weighting synthesis. (However, the precoding matrix # 1 and the precoding matrix # 2 are different matrices.) When "11" is set, data is transmitted using the spatial multiplex MIMO transmission method. (Of course, it can also be interpreted that the precoding matrix of Method 1 in FIG. 49 was selected.)
When "PLP_MODE" is set to "1" and "MIMO_MODE" is set to "1", the information of "MIMO_PATTERN # 2" is valid information, and when "MIMO_PATTERN # 2" is set to "00", it is pre-written. Coding matrix switching method Data is transmitted using the precoding method of regularly switching the precoding matrix of # 1. When "01" is set, data is transmitted using the precoding method of regularly switching the precoding matrix of the precoding matrix switching method # 2. When "10" is set, data is transmitted using the precoding method of regularly switching the precoding matrix of the precoding matrix switching method # 3. When "11" is set, data is transmitted using the precoding method of regularly switching the precoding matrix of the precoding matrix switching method # 4. Here, the precoding matrix switching methods # 1 to # 4 are different methods, but at this time, if the different methods are different, for example, # A and # B are different methods.
-The same precoding matrix is included in the multiple precoding matrices used for #A and the multiple precoding matrices used for #B, but the periods are different.
-There is a precoding matrix that is included in #A but not in #B,
-There is a method in which multiple precoding matrices used in # A are not included in the precoding used in the method # B.

In the above, the control information in Tables 4 and 5 is used as the L1 Post-Signalling data among the P2 symbols.
Explained as being transmitted by. However, in the DVB-T2 standard, the amount of information that can be transmitted as a P2 symbol is limited. Therefore, when the limit of the amount of information that can be transmitted as a P2 symbol is exceeded by adding the information in Tables 4 and 5 in addition to the information that needs to be transmitted by the P2 symbol in the DVB-T2 standard, as shown in FIG. 65. Signaling PLP (6501) may be provided in the above, and control information required for standards other than the DVB-T2 standard (which may be a part, that is, transmitted by both L1 Post-Signalling data and Signaling PLP) may be transmitted. .. In FIG. 65, the frame configuration is the same as that in FIG. 61, but the frame configuration is not limited to this, and the Signaling PLP is set on the time-frequency axis as in the L1 Pre-signaling data in FIG. 62. , A specific time-specific carrier region may be allocated, that is, any Signaling PLP may be allocated on the time-frequency axis.

As described above, by using a multi-carrier transmission method such as the OFDM method and making it possible to select a method of regularly switching the precoding matrix while maintaining compatibility with the DVB-T2 standard. With respect to the LOS environment, it is possible to obtain an advantage that high reception quality can be obtained and a high transmission speed can be obtained. In the present embodiment, as the transmission method in which the carrier group can be set, "spatial multiplex MIMO transmission method, MIMO method using a fixed precoding matrix, MIMO method for regularly switching the precoding matrix, spatiotemporal block". "Transmission method for encoding and transmitting only stream s1" is mentioned, but it is not limited to this, and the MIMO method using a fixed precoding matrix is not limited to method # 2 in FIG. 49, but is fixed. It suffices if it is composed of various precoding matrices.

Then, the broadcasting station selects "spatial multiplex MIMO transmission method, MIMO method using a fixed precoding matrix, MIMO method for regularly switching the precoding matrix, spatiotemporal block coding, transmission method for transmitting only stream s1". Although described in the example of enabling, not all of these transmission methods need to be selectable transmission methods, for example.
MIMO method using a fixed precoding matrix, MIMO method that switches the precoding matrix regularly, spatiotemporal block coding, transmission method that can select the transmission method that transmits only stream s1 MIMO using a fixed precoding matrix Method, MIMO method that regularly switches the precoding matrix, transmission method that can select spatiotemporal block coding MIMO method that uses a fixed precoding matrix, MIMO method that regularly switches the precoding matrix, transmits only stream s1 Transmission method that can select the transmission method to be transmitted MIMO method that regularly switches the precoding matrix, spatiotemporal block coding, transmission method that can select the transmission method that transmits only stream s1, MIMO method that uses a fixed precoding matrix, Transmission method that can select the MIMO method that switches the precoding matrix regularly MIMO method that switches the precoding matrix regularly, transmission method that can select the spatiotemporal block coding MIMO method that switches the precoding matrix regularly, stream By including the MIMO method that regularly switches the precoding matrix like the transmission method that can select the transmission method that transmits only s1, LO
In the S environment, it is possible to obtain the effect that high-speed data transmission can be performed and the reception data quality of the receiving device can be ensured.

At this time, it is necessary to set S1 in the P1 symbol as described above, and as a P2 symbol, as a control information setting method (setting method of the transmission method of each PLP) different from that in Table 4, for example, a table. 6 is conceivable.

The difference between Table 6 and Table 4 is that when "PLP_MODE" is set to "11", it is set to Reserve. As described above, when the selectable transmission method as the PLP transmission method is as shown in the above example, the number of bits constituting PLP_MODE in Tables 4 and 6, for example, depends on the number of selectable transmission methods. It may be larger or smaller.

The same applies to Table 5. For example, if only the precoding method of regularly switching the precoding matrix is supported as the MIMO transmission method, the control information of "MIMO_MODE" is not required. Further, in "MIMO_PATTER # 1", for example, when the precoding matrix does not support a fixed MIMO method, the control information of "MIMO_PATTER # 1" may not be required, and the precoding matrix is fixed. When a plurality of precoding matrices used in a typical MIMO system are not required, 1-bit control information may be used instead of 2-bit control information, and when a plurality of precoding matrices can be set, 2 It may be control information of bits or more.

The same can be considered for "MIMO_PATTERN # 2", and when multiple precoding matrix switching methods are not required as the precoding method for regularly switching the precoding matrix, 1-bit control instead of 2-bit control information is required. It may be information, and if it is possible to set a method of switching a plurality of precoding matrices, it may be control information of 2 bits or more.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the number of antennas of the transmitting device is 2 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the control information may be similarly transmitted even when the number of antennas is larger than 2. At this time, in addition to the case where the modulated signal is transmitted using the two antennas, there is a case where it is necessary to increase the number of bits constituting each control information in order to carry out the case where the modulated signal is transmitted using the four antennas. do. At this time, the point that the control information is transmitted by the P1 symbol and the control information is transmitted by the P2 symbol is the same as the case described above.
Regarding the frame configuration of the PLP symbol group transmitted by the broadcasting station, a method of transmitting in time division as shown in FIG. 64 has been described, but a modified example thereof will be described below.

FIG. 66 shows an example of a method of arranging the symbols of the streams s1 and s2 on the frequency-time axis after transmitting the P1 symbol, the P2 symbol, and the Common PLP, which are different from those in FIG. 64. In FIG. 66, the symbol described as “# 1” indicates one symbol in the symbol group of PLP # 1 in FIG. 64. Similarly, the symbol described as "# 2" indicates one of the symbols of PLP # 2 in FIG. 64, and the symbol described as "# 3" indicates PLP in FIG. 64. It indicates one symbol of the symbol group of # 3, and the symbol described as “# 4” indicates one symbol of the symbol group of PLP # 4 in FIG. 64. Then, as in FIG. 64, PLP # 1 shall transmit data using the spatial multiplex MIMO transmission method shown in FIG. 49 or the MIMO transmission method in which the precoding matrix is fixed. Then, PLP # 2 transmits data by transmitting one modulated signal. PLP # 3 shall transmit data using a precoding method that regularly switches the precoding matrix. PLP # 4 shall transmit data using the spatiotemporal block code shown in FIG. The symbol arrangement in the spatiotemporal block code is not limited to the time direction, and may be arranged in the frequency axis direction, or may be appropriately arranged in the symbol group formed in the time-frequency range. Further, the spatiotemporal block code is not limited to the method described with reference to FIG.

In FIG. 66, when the symbols exist at the same time of the same subcarrier in both s1 and s2, the symbols of the two streams exist at the same frequency. As described in other embodiments, when precoding including a precoding method for regularly switching the precoding matrix is performed, s1 and s2 are weighted by using the precoding matrix, and Synthesis is performed, and z1 and z2 are output from the antenna, respectively.

The difference between FIG. 66 and FIG. 64 is that, as described above, FIG. 64 shows an example in which a plurality of PLPs are arranged in time division, but in FIG. 66, unlike FIG. 64, time division and frequency division are shown. Are used in combination to allow a plurality of PLPs to exist. That is, for example, at time 1, the symbol of PLP # 1 and the symbol of PLP # 2 exist, and at time 3, the symbol of PLP # 3 and the symbol of PLP # 4 exist. In this way, PLP symbols with different indexes (#X; X = 1, 2, ...) Can be assigned to each symbol (composed of 1 time and 1 subcarrier).

In FIG. 66, simply, at time 1, only "# 1" and "# 2" exist, but the index is not limited to this, and indexes other than PLP of "# 1" and "# 2" are not limited to this. The PLP symbol of PLP may exist at time 1, and the relationship between the subcarrier and the PLP index at time 1 is not limited to FIG. 66, and the PLP symbol of which index is assigned to the subcarrier. Is also good. Similarly, at other times, the PLP symbol of any index may be assigned to the subcarrier.

FIG. 67 shows an example of a method of arranging the symbols of the streams s1 and s2 on the frequency-time axis after transmitting the P1 symbol, the P2 symbol, and the Common PLP different from those in FIG. 64. The characteristic part in FIG. 67 is that, in the T2 frame, when the transmission method of PLP is based on the transmission of a plurality of antennas, the “transmission method of transmitting only the stream s1” cannot be selected.
Therefore, in FIG. 67, it is assumed that data is transmitted in the symbol group 6701 of PLP # 1 by "spatial multiplex MIMO transmission method or MIMO method using a fixed precoding matrix". It is assumed that the symbol group 6702 of PLP # 2 transmits data by the "precoding method for regularly switching the precoding matrix". It is assumed that data is transmitted in the symbol group 6703 of PLP # 3 by the "spatio-temporal block code". Then, the PLP symbol group in the T2 frame after the symbol group 6703 of PLP # 3 is "spatial multiplex MIMO transmission method or MIMO method using a fixed precoding matrix", "regularly precoding matrix. Data will be transmitted by either the "precoding method for switching" or the "spatio-temporal block code" transmission method.

FIG. 68 shows an example of a method of arranging the symbols of the streams s1 and s2 on the frequency-time axis after transmitting the P1 symbol, the P2 symbol, and the Common PLP, which are different from those in FIG. In FIG. 68, the symbol described as “# 1” indicates one symbol in the symbol group of PLP # 1 in FIG. 67. Similarly, the symbol described as "# 2" indicates one of the symbols of PLP # 2 in FIG. 67, and the symbol described as "# 3" indicates PLP in FIG. 67. It shows one symbol in the symbol group of # 3. Then, as in FIG. 67, PLP # 1 shall transmit data using the spatial multiplex MIMO transmission method shown in FIG. 49 or the MIMO transmission method in which the precoding matrix is fixed. Then, PLP # 2 shall transmit data by using a precoding method in which the precoding matrix is regularly switched. PLP # 3 shall transmit data using the spatiotemporal block code shown in FIG. The symbol arrangement in the spatiotemporal block code is not limited to the time direction, and may be arranged in the frequency axis direction, or may be appropriately arranged in the symbol group formed in the time-frequency range. Further, the spatiotemporal block code is not limited to the method described with reference to FIG.

In FIG. 68, when the symbols exist at the same time of the same subcarrier in both s1 and s2, the symbols of the two streams exist at the same frequency. As described in other embodiments, when precoding including a precoding method for regularly switching the precoding matrix is performed, s1 and s2 are weighted by using the precoding matrix, and Synthesis is performed, and z1 and z2 are output from the antenna, respectively.
The difference between FIG. 68 and FIG. 67 is that, as described above, FIG. 67 shows an example in which a plurality of PLPs are arranged in time division, but in FIG. 68, unlike FIG. 67, time division and frequency division are performed. Are used in combination to allow a plurality of PLPs to exist. That is, for example, at time 1, the symbol of PLP # 1 and the symbol of PLP # 2 exist. In this way, PLP symbols with different indexes (#X; X = 1, 2, ...) Can be assigned to each symbol (composed of 1 time and 1 subcarrier).

In FIG. 68, simply, at time 1, only "# 1" and "# 2" exist, but the index is not limited to this, and indexes other than PLP of "# 1" and "# 2" are used. The PLP symbol of PLP may exist at time 1, and the relationship between the subcarrier and the PLP index at time 1 is not limited to FIG. 68, and the PLP symbol of which index is assigned to the subcarrier. Is also good. Similarly, at other times, the PLP symbol of any index may be assigned to the subcarrier. On the other hand, at a certain time, such as time 3, only one PLP symbol may be assigned. That is, the PLP symbols may be assigned in any time-frequency frame method.

As described above, since there is no PLP using the "transmission method for transmitting only the stream s1" in the T2 frame, the dynamic range of the received signal received by the terminal can be suppressed, so that good reception quality can be obtained. The effect of being able to increase the sex can be obtained.

In the description of FIG. 68, as a transmission method, "spatial multiplex MIMO transmission method,
Alternatively, the example of selecting one of "MIMO method using a fixed precoding matrix", "precoding method for regularly switching the precoding matrix", and "spatiotemporal block code" has been described, but these transmission methods Do not have to be all selectable, for example
・ "Precoding method that switches the precoding matrix regularly", "Spatio-temporal block code", and "MIMO method that uses a fixed precoding matrix" can be selected. ・ "Precoding method that switches the precoding matrix regularly" , "Spatio-temporal block code" can be selected.-" Precoding method for regularly switching precoding matrices" and "MIMO method using a fixed precoding matrix" may be selectable.

In the above description, the case where a plurality of PLPs exist in the T2 frame has been described, but the case where only one PLP exists in the T2 frame will be described below.
FIG. 69 shows an example of the frame configuration of the streams s1 and s2 on the time-frequency axis when only one PLP exists in the T2 frame. Although it is described as a "control symbol" in FIG. 69, this means a symbol such as the P1 symbol and the P2 symbol described above. Then, in FIG. 69, the first T2 frame is transmitted using the section 1, similarly, the second T2 frame is transmitted using the section 2, and the third T2 is transmitted using the section 3. The frame is transmitted, and the fourth T2 frame is transmitted using the section 4.

Further, in FIG. 69, in the first T2 frame, the symbol group 6801 of PLP # 1-1 is transmitted, and as the transmission method, "spatial multiplex MIMO transmission method or a fixed precoding matrix is used. "MIMO method" is selected.

In the second T2 frame, the symbol group 6802 of PLP # 2-1 is transmitted, and "a method of transmitting one modulated signal" is selected as the transmission method.
In the third T2 frame, the symbol group 6803 of PLP # 3-1 is transmitted, and "a precoding method for regularly switching the precoding matrix" is selected as the transmission method.

In the fourth T2 frame, the symbol group 6804 of PLP # 4-1 is transmitted, and "spatio-temporal block code" is selected as the transmission method. The symbol arrangement in the spatiotemporal block code is not limited to the time direction, and may be arranged in the frequency axis direction, or may be appropriately arranged in the symbol group formed in the time-frequency range. Further, the spatiotemporal block code is not limited to the method described with reference to FIG.

In FIG. 69, when the symbols exist at the same time of the same subcarrier in both s1 and s2, the symbols of the two streams exist at the same frequency. As described in other embodiments, when precoding including a precoding method for regularly switching the precoding matrix is performed, s1 and s2 are weighted by using the precoding matrix, and Synthesis is performed, and z1 and z2 are output from the antenna, respectively.

By doing so, the transmission method can be set in consideration of the data transmission speed and the data reception quality of the terminal for each PLP, so that the data transmission speed can be improved and the data reception quality can be ensured at the same time. It becomes possible. An example of a method for configuring control information such as a transmission method for P1 symbols and P2 symbols (in some cases, Signaling PLP) can be similarly implemented by configuring as shown in Tables 3 to 6 above. .. The difference is that in the frame configuration shown in FIG. 64 and the like, since one T2 frame has a plurality of PLPs, control information such as a transmission method for the plurality of PLPs is required. In this case, since there is only one PLP in one T2 frame, only control information such as a transmission method for that one PLP is required.

In the above, the method of transmitting information on the PLP transmission method using the P1 symbol and the P2 symbol (Signalling PLP in some cases) has been described, but in the following, in particular, the PLP transmission method without using the P2 symbol. Describes how to transmit information about.

FIG. 70 shows a frame configuration on the time-frequency axis when the terminal to which the broadcasting station transmits data corresponds to a standard other than the DVB-T2 standard. In FIG. 70, the same reference numerals are given to those operating in the same manner as in FIG. 61. The frames of FIG. 70 are P1 Signaling data (6101), 1st Signaling data (7001), 2nd Signaling data (7002), Common PLP (6104), PLP # 1 to # N (6105-1 to 6105_).
It is composed of N) (PLP: Physical Layer Pipe). In this way, P1 Signaling data (6101), 1st Signaling data (7001), 2nd Signaling data (700)
2), a frame composed of Common PLP (6104) and PLP # 1 to #N (6105-1 to 6105_N) is one frame unit.

According to P1 Signaling data (6101), it is a symbol for the receiving device to perform signal detection and frequency synchronization (including frequency offset estimation), and at the same time, in this case, to identify whether or not it is a DVB-T2 standard frame. It is necessary to transmit the data of the above, for example, S1 shown in Table 3, that the signal is / is not a DVB-T2 standard signal.

According to the first Signaling data (7001), for example, information on the guard interval used in the transmission frame, information on the PAPR (Peak to Average Power Ratio) method, the modulation method when transmitting the second Signaling data, the error correction method, and the like. Which method is used: the coding rate information of the error correction method, the size and information size information of the second Signaling data, the pilot pattern information, the cell (frequency region) unique number information, and the normal mode or the extended mode. A method of transmitting the information of the above is conceivable. At this time, the first Signaling data (7001) does not necessarily have to transmit data conforming to the DVB-T2 standard.

According to the second Signaling data (7002), for example, information on the number of PLPs, information on the frequency region used, information on the unique number of each PLP, a modulation method used for transmitting each PLP, an error correction method, and error correction. Information on the coding rate of the method, information on the number of blocks to be transmitted by each PLP, and the like are transmitted.

In the frame configuration of FIG. 70, the first Signaling data (7001), the second Signaling data (7002), the L1 Post-Signalling data (6103), the Common PLP (6104), and the PLPs # 1 to #N (6105-1 to 6105_N) are Although it is described as being transmitted in time division, in reality, two or more types of signals exist at the same time. An example thereof is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 71, the first Signaling data, the second Signaling data, and the Common PLP may exist at the same time, or PLP # 1 and PLP # 2 may exist at the same time. That is, each signal uses time division and frequency division in combination to form a frame.

FIG. 72 shows an example of the configuration of a transmission device to which a transmission method of regularly switching the precoding matrix described above is applied to a transmission device of a standard different from DVB-T2 (for example, a broadcasting station). Shown. In FIG. 72, those operating in the same manner as in FIG. 63 are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description of the operation will be the same as described above. The control signal generation unit 6308 receives the transmission data 7201 for the first and second Signaling data and the transmission data 6307 for the P1 symbol as inputs, and the transmission method (error correction code, code of the error correction code) of each symbol group in FIG. 70. PAPR reduction methods such as conversion rate, modulation method, block length, frame configuration, selected transmission method including transmission method for regularly switching precoding matrices, pilot symbol insertion method, IFFT (Inverse Fast Fourier Transform) / FFT information, etc. Information, information on the guard interval insertion method) is output as a control signal 6309.

The control symbol signal generation unit 7202 receives transmission data 7201 and control signal 6309 for the first and second signaling data as inputs, and provides error correction information and modulation method for the first and second signaling data included in the control signal 6309. Based on information such as information, error correction coding and mapping based on a modulation method are performed, and the (orthogonal) baseband signal 7203 of the first and second Signaling data is output.

Next, the frame configuration and control information (P1 symbol and P1 symbol) of the transmission signal of the broadcasting station (base station) when the method of regularly switching the precoding matrix is applied to a system having a standard different from DVB-T2. 1. The transmission method of (information transmitted by the second Signaling data) will be described in detail.

FIG. 64 shows an example of the frame configuration on the frequency-time axis when a plurality of PLPs are transmitted after transmitting the P1 symbol, the first and second Signaling data, and the Common PLP. In FIG. 64, the stream s1 uses subcarriers # 1 to subcarrier # M on the frequency axis, and similarly, the stream s2 uses subcarriers # 1 to subcarrier # M on the frequency axis. Therefore, if the symbols exist at the same time of the same subcarrier in both s1 and s2, the symbols of the two streams exist at the same frequency. As described in other embodiments, when precoding including a precoding method for regularly switching the precoding matrix is performed, s1 and s2 are weighted by using the precoding matrix, and Synthesis is performed, and z1 and z2 are output from the antenna, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 64, the section 1 transmits the symbol group 6401 of PLP # 1 using the streams s1 and s2, and the spatial multiplex MIMO transmission method or the precoding matrix shown in FIG. 49 is used. Data shall be transmitted using a fixed MIMO transmission method.

In the section 2, the symbol group 6402 of PLP # 2 is transmitted using the stream s1, and data is transmitted by transmitting one modulated signal.
In section 3, streams s1 and streams s2 are used to transmit the symbol group 6403 of PLP # 3, and data is transmitted using a precoding method in which the precoding matrix is regularly switched.

In the section 4, stream s1 and stream s2 are used to transmit the symbol group 6404 of PLP # 4, and data is transmitted using the spatiotemporal block code shown in FIG. The symbol arrangement in the spatiotemporal block code is not limited to the time direction, and may be arranged in the frequency axis direction, or may be appropriately arranged in the symbol group formed in the time-frequency range. Further, the spatiotemporal block code is not limited to the method described with reference to FIG.

When the broadcasting station transmits each PLP as shown in FIG. 64, the receiving device that receives the transmission signal of FIG. 64 needs to know the transmission method of each PLP. Therefore, as described above, it is necessary to transmit the information of the transmission method of each PLP by using the first and second Signaling data. Hereinafter, an example of a method of constructing the P1 symbol at this time and a method of constructing the first and second Signaling data will be described. Table 3 shows specific examples of control information transmitted using the P1 symbol.
In the DVB-T2 standard, whether or not the DVB-T2 standard is used based on the control information (3-bit information) of S1, and if the DVB-T2 standard is used, the receiving device determines the transmission method used. You can judge. When "000" is set as the 3-bit S1 information, the modulated signal to be transmitted conforms to "transmission of one modulated signal of the DVB-T2 standard".

Further, when "001" is set as the 3-bit S1 information, the modulated signal to be transmitted conforms to "transmission using the spatio-temporal block code of the DVB-T2 standard".
In the DVB-T2 standard, "010" to "111" are "Reserve" for the future. Here, in order to apply the present invention so as to be compatible with DVB-T2, for example, when "010" is set as the 3-bit S1 information (other than "000" and "001" may be used. ), It is decided that the modulated signal to be transmitted conforms to a standard other than DVB-T2, and when the receiving device of the terminal finds that this information is "010", the modulated signal transmitted by the broadcasting station is transmitted. It can be known that it conforms to a standard other than DVB-T2.
Next, an example of how to configure the first and second Signaling data when the modulated signal transmitted by the broadcasting station conforms to a standard other than DVB-T2 will be described. Table 4 shows the first example of the control information of the first and second Signaling data.

As shown in FIG. 64, the 2-bit information "PLP_MODE" shown in Table 4 is control information for notifying the terminal of the transmission method of each PLP (PLPs # 1 to # 4 in FIG. 64). Yes, the information of PLP_MODE will exist for each PLP. That is, in the case of FIG. 64, the PLP_MODE information for PLP # 1, the PLP_MODE information for PLP # 2, the PLP_MODE information for PLP # 3, the PLP_MODE information for PLP # 4, and so on. , Will be transmitted from the broadcasting station. As a matter of course, the terminal can recognize the transmission method used by the broadcasting station for PLP by demodulating this information (and also performing error correction and decoding).

When "00" is set as "PLP_MODE", the PLP transmits data by "transmitting one modulated signal". When set to "01", the PLP transmits data by "transmitting a plurality of modulated signals subjected to spatiotemporal block coding". When set to "10", data is transmitted to the PLP using a "precoding method for regularly switching the precoding matrix". When "11" is set, data is transmitted to the PLP by using "a MIMO method in which the precoding matrix is fixed or a spatial multiplex MIMO transmission method".
When "PLP_MODE" is set to "01" to "11", what kind of processing is specifically performed by the broadcasting station (for example, specific switching in the method of regularly switching the precoding matrix). It is necessary to transmit the method, the spatiotemporal lock coding method used, and the configuration of the matrix used as the precoding matrix) to the terminal. A method of configuring control information different from that in Table 4, including the configuration of control information at this time, will be described below.

Table 5 shows a second example of the control information of the first and second Signaling data.
As shown in Table 5, 1-bit information "PLP_MODE", 1-bit information "MIMO_MODE", 2-bit information "MIMO_PATTERN # 1", and 2-bit information "MIMO_PATTER # 2" are These four control information exist and are information for notifying the terminal of the transmission method of each PLP (PLP # 1 to # 4 in FIG. 64) as shown in FIG. 64, and therefore these four control information. The control information will exist for each PLP. That is, in the case of FIG. 64, PLP_MODE information / MIMO_MODE information for PLP # 1, MIMO_PATTERN # 1 information / MIMO_PATTER # 2, PLP_MODE information for PLP # 2, MIMO_MODE information / MIMO_PATTERN # 1 Information / Information of MIMO_PATTER # 2, PLP_MODE information for PLP # 3 / Information of MIMO_MODE / Information of MIMO_PATTERN # 1 / Information of MIMO_PATTER # 2, Information of PLP_MODE for PLP # 4 / Information of MIMO_MODERN / MIMO_PATTERN The information of # 1 / the information of MIMO_PATTER # 2 ... Will be transmitted from the broadcasting station. As a matter of course, the terminal can recognize the transmission method used by the broadcasting station for PLP by demodulating this information (and also performing error correction and decoding).

When "0" is set as "PLP_MODE", the PLP transmits data by "transmitting one modulated signal". When set to "1", the PLP is "transmitting multiple modulated signals with spatiotemporal block coding", "precoding method for regularly switching precoding matrices", and "fixed precoding matrix". Data is transmitted by either "Native MIMO method" or "Spatial multiplex MIMO transmission method".

When "PLP_MODE" is set to "1", the information of "MIMO_MODE" becomes valid information, and when "MIMO_MODE" is set to "0", the precoding method of regularly switching the precoding matrix is used. Without, the data is transmitted. When "1" is set as "MIMO_MODE", data is transmitted using a precoding method in which the precoding matrix is regularly switched.

When "PLP_MODE" is set to "1" and "MIMO_MODE" is set to "0", the information of "MIMO_PATTERN # 1" is valid information, and when "MIMO_PATTERN # 1" is set to "00", the hour Data is transmitted using spatial block code. When "01" is set, the data is transmitted by using the precoding method in which the precoding matrix # 1 is fixedly used for weighting synthesis. When "10" is set, the data is transmitted by using the precoding method in which the precoding matrix # 2 is fixedly used for weighting synthesis. (However, the precoding matrix # 1 and the precoding matrix # 2 are different matrices.) When "11" is set, data is transmitted using the spatial multiplex MIMO transmission method. (Of course, it can also be interpreted that the precoding matrix of Method 1 in FIG. 49 was selected.)
When "PLP_MODE" is set to "1" and "MIMO_MODE" is set to "1", the information of "MIMO_PATTERN # 2" is valid information, and when "MIMO_PATTERN # 2" is set to "00", it is pre-written. Coding matrix switching method Data is transmitted using the precoding method of regularly switching the precoding matrix of # 1. When "01" is set, data is transmitted using the precoding method of regularly switching the precoding matrix of the precoding matrix switching method # 2. When "10" is set, data is transmitted using the precoding method of regularly switching the precoding matrix of the precoding matrix switching method # 3. When "11" is set, data is transmitted using the precoding method of regularly switching the precoding matrix of the precoding matrix switching method # 4. Here, the precoding matrix switching methods # 1 to # 4 are different methods, but at this time, if the different methods are different, for example, # A and # B are different methods.
-The same precoding matrix is included in the multiple precoding matrices used for #A and the multiple precoding matrices used for #B, but the periods are different.
-There is a precoding matrix that is included in #A but not in #B,
-There is a method in which multiple precoding matrices used in # A are not included in the precoding used in the method # B.

In the above description, the control information in Tables 4 and 5 has been described as being transmitted by the first and second Signaling data. In this case, there is an advantage that it is not necessary to use PLP in particular to transmit control information.

As described above, the precoding matrix is regularly switched to a standard different from the DVB-T2 while using a multi-carrier transmission method such as the OFDM method and being able to distinguish from the DVB-T2 standard. By making it possible to select the method, it is possible to obtain an advantage that high reception quality can be obtained and a high transmission speed can be obtained for the LOS environment. In the present embodiment, as the transmission method in which the carrier group can be set, "spatial multiplex MIMO transmission method, MIMO method using a fixed precoding matrix, MIMO method for regularly switching the precoding matrix, spatiotemporal block". "Transmission method for encoding and transmitting only stream s1" is mentioned, but it is not limited to this, and the MIMO method using a fixed precoding matrix is not limited to method # 2 in FIG. 49, but is fixed. It suffices if it is composed of various precoding matrices.

Then, the broadcasting station selects "spatial multiplex MIMO transmission method, MIMO method using a fixed precoding matrix, MIMO method for regularly switching the precoding matrix, spatiotemporal block coding, transmission method for transmitting only stream s1". Although described in the example of enabling, not all of these transmission methods need to be selectable transmission methods, for example.
MIMO method using a fixed precoding matrix, MIMO method that switches the precoding matrix regularly, spatiotemporal block coding, transmission method that can select the transmission method that transmits only stream s1 MIMO using a fixed precoding matrix Method, MIMO method that regularly switches the precoding matrix, transmission method that can select spatiotemporal block coding MIMO method that uses a fixed precoding matrix, MIMO method that regularly switches the precoding matrix, transmits only stream s1 Transmission method that can select the transmission method to be transmitted MIMO method that regularly switches the precoding matrix, spatiotemporal block coding, transmission method that can select the transmission method that transmits only the stream s1, MIMO method that uses a fixed precoding matrix, A transmission method in which the MIMO method for regularly switching the precoding matrix can be selected. A MIMO method in which the precoding matrix is regularly switched, a transmission method in which the spatiotemporal block coding can be selected. By including the MIMO method that regularly switches the precoding matrix like the transmission method that can select the transmission method that transmits only s1, high-speed data transmission can be performed in the LOS environment, and the receiving device can perform high-speed data transmission. The effect of ensuring the quality of received data can be obtained.

At this time, it is necessary to set S1 in the P1 symbol as described above, and as the first and second Signaling data, a control information setting method different from that in Table 4 (a transmission method setting method for each PLP). For example, Table 6 can be considered.

The difference between Table 6 and Table 4 is that when "PLP_MODE" is set to "11", it is set to Reserve. As described above, when the selectable transmission method as the PLP transmission method is as shown in the above example, the number of bits constituting PLP_MODE in Tables 4 and 6, for example, depends on the number of selectable transmission methods. It may be larger or smaller.

The same applies to Table 5. For example, if only the precoding method of regularly switching the precoding matrix is supported as the MIMO transmission method, the control information of "MIMO_MODE" is not required. Further, in "MIMO_PATTER # 1", for example, when the precoding matrix does not support a fixed MIMO method, the control information of "MIMO_PATTER # 1" may not be required, and the precoding matrix is fixed. When a plurality of precoding matrices used in a typical MIMO system are not required, 1-bit control information may be used instead of 2-bit control information, and when a plurality of precoding matrices can be set, 2 It may be control information of bits or more.

The same can be considered for "MIMO_PATTERN # 2", and when multiple precoding matrix switching methods are not required as the precoding method for regularly switching the precoding matrix, 1-bit control instead of 2-bit control information is required. It may be information, and if it is possible to set a method of switching a plurality of precoding matrices, it may be control information of 2 bits or more.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the number of antennas of the transmitting device is 2 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the control information may be similarly transmitted even when the number of antennas is larger than 2. At this time, in addition to the case where the modulated signal is transmitted using the two antennas, there is a case where it is necessary to increase the number of bits constituting each control information in order to carry out the case where the modulated signal is transmitted using the four antennas. do. At this time, the point that the control information is transmitted by the P1 symbol and the control information is transmitted by the first and second Signaling data is the same as the case described above.

Regarding the frame configuration of the PLP symbol group transmitted by the broadcasting station, a method of transmitting in time division as shown in FIG. 64 has been described, but a modified example thereof will be described below.
FIG. 66 shows an example of a method of arranging the symbols of the streams s1 and s2 on the frequency-time axis after transmitting the P1 symbol, the first and second Signaling data, and the Common PLP, which are different from those in FIG. 64.

In FIG. 66, the symbol described as “# 1” indicates one symbol in the symbol group of PLP # 1 in FIG. 64. Similarly, the symbol described as "# 2" indicates one of the symbols of PLP # 2 in FIG. 64, and the symbol described as "# 3" indicates PLP in FIG. 64. It indicates one symbol of the symbol group of # 3, and the symbol described as “# 4” indicates one symbol of the symbol group of PLP # 4 in FIG. 64. Then, as in FIG. 64, PLP # 1 shall transmit data using the spatial multiplex MIMO transmission method shown in FIG. 49 or the MIMO transmission method in which the precoding matrix is fixed. Then, PLP # 2 transmits data by transmitting one modulated signal. PLP # 3 shall transmit data using a precoding method that regularly switches the precoding matrix. PLP # 4 shall transmit data using the spatiotemporal block code shown in FIG. The symbol arrangement in the spatiotemporal block code is not limited to the time direction, and may be arranged in the frequency axis direction, or may be appropriately arranged in the symbol group formed in the time-frequency range. Further, the spatiotemporal block code is not limited to the method described with reference to FIG.

In FIG. 66, when the symbols exist at the same time of the same subcarrier in both s1 and s2, the symbols of the two streams exist at the same frequency. As described in other embodiments, when precoding including a precoding method for regularly switching the precoding matrix is performed, s1 and s2 are weighted by using the precoding matrix, and Synthesis is performed, and z1 and z2 are output from the antenna, respectively.

The difference between FIG. 66 and FIG. 64 is that, as described above, FIG. 64 shows an example in which a plurality of PLPs are arranged in time division, but in FIG. 66, unlike FIG. 64, time division and frequency division are shown. Are used in combination to allow a plurality of PLPs to exist. That is, for example, at time 1, the symbol of PLP # 1 and the symbol of PLP # 2 exist, and at time 3, the symbol of PLP # 3 and the symbol of PLP # 4 exist. In this way, PLP symbols with different indexes (#X; X = 1, 2, ...) Can be assigned to each symbol (composed of 1 time and 1 subcarrier).

In FIG. 66, simply, at time 1, only "# 1" and "# 2" exist, but the index is not limited to this, and indexes other than PLP of "# 1" and "# 2" are not limited to this. The PLP symbol of PLP may exist at time 1, and the relationship between the subcarrier and the PLP index at time 1 is not limited to FIG. 66, and the PLP symbol of which index is assigned to the subcarrier. Is also good. Similarly, at other times, the PLP symbol of any index may be assigned to the subcarrier.

FIG. 67 shows an example of a method of arranging the symbols of the streams s1 and s2 on the frequency-time axis after transmitting the P1 symbols, the first and second Signaling data, and the Common PLP, which are different from those in FIG. 64. The characteristic part in FIG. 67 is that, in the T2 frame, when the transmission method of PLP is based on the transmission of a plurality of antennas, the “transmission method of transmitting only the stream s1” cannot be selected.

Therefore, in FIG. 67, it is assumed that data is transmitted in the symbol group 6701 of PLP # 1 by "spatial multiplex MIMO transmission method or MIMO method using a fixed precoding matrix". It is assumed that the symbol group 6702 of PLP # 2 transmits data by the "precoding method for regularly switching the precoding matrix". It is assumed that data is transmitted in the symbol group 6703 of PLP # 3 by the "spatio-temporal block code". Then, the PLP symbol group in the unit frame after the symbol group 6703 of PLP # 3 is "spatial multiplex MIMO transmission method or MIMO method using a fixed precoding matrix", "regularly precoding matrix. Data will be transmitted by either the "precoding method for switching" or the "spatio-temporal block code" transmission method.

FIG. 68 shows an example of a method of arranging the symbols of the streams s1 and s2 on the frequency-time axis after transmitting the P1 symbol, the first and second Signaling data, and the Common PLP, which are different from those in FIG.

In FIG. 68, the symbol described as “# 1” indicates one symbol in the symbol group of PLP # 1 in FIG. 67. Similarly, the symbol described as "# 2" indicates one of the symbols of PLP # 2 in FIG. 67, and the symbol described as "# 3" indicates PLP in FIG. 67. It shows one symbol in the symbol group of # 3. Then, as in FIG. 67, PLP # 1 shall transmit data using the spatial multiplex MIMO transmission method shown in FIG. 49 or the MIMO transmission method in which the precoding matrix is fixed. Then, PLP # 2 shall transmit data by using a precoding method in which the precoding matrix is regularly switched. PLP # 3 shall transmit data using the spatiotemporal block code shown in FIG. The symbol arrangement in the spatiotemporal block code is not limited to the time direction, and may be arranged in the frequency axis direction, or may be appropriately arranged in the symbol group formed in the time-frequency range. Further, the spatiotemporal block code is not limited to the method described with reference to FIG.

In FIG. 68, when the symbols exist at the same time of the same subcarrier in both s1 and s2, the symbols of the two streams exist at the same frequency. As described in other embodiments, when precoding including a precoding method for regularly switching the precoding matrix is performed, s1 and s2 are weighted by using the precoding matrix, and Synthesis is performed, and z1 and z2 are output from the antenna, respectively.

The difference between FIG. 68 and FIG. 67 is that, as described above, FIG. 67 shows an example in which a plurality of PLPs are arranged in time division, but in FIG. 68, unlike FIG. 67, time division and frequency division are performed. Are used in combination to allow a plurality of PLPs to exist. That is, for example, at time 1, the symbol of PLP # 1 and the symbol of PLP # 2 exist. In this way, PLP symbols with different indexes (#X; X = 1, 2, ...) Can be assigned to each symbol (composed of 1 time and 1 subcarrier).

In FIG. 68, simply, at time 1, only "# 1" and "# 2" exist, but the index is not limited to this, and indexes other than PLP of "# 1" and "# 2" are used. The PLP symbol of PLP may exist at time 1, and the relationship between the subcarrier and the PLP index at time 1 is not limited to FIG. 68, and the PLP symbol of which index is assigned to the subcarrier. Is also good. Similarly, at other times, the PLP symbol of any index may be assigned to the subcarrier. On the other hand, at a certain time, such as time 3, only one PLP symbol may be assigned. That is, the PLP symbols may be assigned in any time-frequency frame method.

As described above, since there is no PLP using the "transmission method for transmitting only the stream s1" in the unit frame, the dynamic range of the received signal received by the terminal can be suppressed, so that good reception quality can be obtained. The effect of being able to increase the sex can be obtained.

In the description of FIG. 68, as the transmission method, "spatial multiplex MIMO transmission method or MIMO method using a fixed precoding matrix", "precoding method for regularly switching the precoding matrix", and "time". Although the example of selecting one of the "spatial block codes" has been described, it is not necessary to assume that all of these transmission methods can be selected. For example,
・ "Precoding method that switches the precoding matrix regularly", "Spatio-temporal block code", and "MIMO method that uses a fixed precoding matrix" can be selected. ・ "Precoding method that switches the precoding matrix regularly" , "Spatio-temporal block code" can be selected.-" Precoding method for regularly switching precoding matrices" and "MIMO method using a fixed precoding matrix" may be selectable.

In the above, the case where a plurality of PLPs exist in the unit frame has been described, but the case where only one PLP exists in the unit frame will be described below.
FIG. 69 shows an example of the frame configuration of the streams s1 and s2 on the time-frequency axis when only one PLP exists in the unit frame.

In FIG. 69, the term "control symbol" is used, which means the P1 symbol described above and symbols such as the first and second Signaling data. Then, in FIG. 69, the first unit frame is transmitted using the section 1, and similarly, the second unit frame is transmitted using the section 2, and the third unit is transmitted using the section 3. The frame is transmitted, and the fourth unit frame is transmitted using the section 4.

Further, in FIG. 69, in the first unit frame, the symbol group 6801 of PLP # 1-1 is transmitted, and as the transmission method, "spatial multiplex MIMO transmission method or a fixed precoding matrix is used. "MIMO method" is selected.

In the second unit frame, the symbol group 6802 of PLP # 2-1 is transmitted, and "a method of transmitting one modulated signal" is selected as the transmission method.
In the third unit frame, the symbol group 6803 of PLP # 3-1 is transmitted, and "a precoding method for regularly switching the precoding matrix" is selected as the transmission method.

In the fourth unit frame, the symbol group 6804 of PLP # 4-1 is transmitted, and "spatio-temporal block code" is selected as the transmission method. The symbol arrangement in the spatiotemporal block code is not limited to the time direction, and may be arranged in the frequency axis direction, or may be appropriately arranged in the symbol group formed in the time-frequency range. Further, the spatiotemporal block code is not limited to the method described with reference to FIG.

In FIG. 69, when the symbols exist at the same time of the same subcarrier in both s1 and s2, the symbols of the two streams exist at the same frequency. As described in other embodiments, when precoding including a precoding method for regularly switching the precoding matrix is performed, s1 and s2 are weighted by using the precoding matrix, and Synthesis is performed, and z1 and z2 are output from the antenna, respectively.

By doing so, the transmission method can be set in consideration of the data transmission speed and the data reception quality of the terminal for each PLP, so that the data transmission speed can be improved and the data reception quality can be ensured at the same time. It becomes possible. An example of a method for configuring control information such as a transmission method for the P1 symbol and the first and second Signaling data can be similarly implemented if the control information is configured as shown in Tables 3 to 6 above. The difference is that in the frame configuration shown in FIG. 64 and the like, since one unit frame has a plurality of PLPs, control information such as a transmission method for the plurality of PLPs is required. In this case, since there is only one PLP in one unit frame, only control information such as a transmission method for the one PLP is required.

In the present embodiment, the application method when the precoding method for regularly switching the precoding matrix is applied to the system using the DVB standard has been described. At this time, examples of the precoding method for regularly switching the precoding matrix are as shown in the first to the sixth embodiments. However, the method of regularly switching the precoding matrix is not limited to the methods shown in the first to the sixth embodiments, and a plurality of precoding matrices are prepared and a plurality of prepared ones are prepared. If one precoding matrix is selected for each slot from the precoding matrices of the above, precoding is performed, and the precoding matrix to be used regularly is switched for each slot, the present embodiment is: It can be carried out in the same way.

Further, in the present embodiment, the control information is referred to in a special way, but the calling does not affect the present invention.




(Embodiment A2)
In the present embodiment, the receiving method and the receiving device when the method of applying the method of regularly switching the precoding matrix to the communication system using the DVB-T2 standard described in the embodiment A1 is used. The configuration of is described in detail.

FIG. 73 shows an example of the configuration of the receiving device of the terminal when the transmitting device of the broadcasting station of FIG. 63 applies the precoding method of regularly switching the precoding matrix. Those that operate in the same manner are given the same reference numerals.

In FIG. 73, the P1 symbol detection / demodulation unit 7301 receives the signal transmitted by the broadcasting station, inputs the signals 704_X and 704_Y after signal processing, and detects the P1 symbol to perform signal detection and time-frequency synchronization. At the same time, the control information included in the P1 symbol is obtained (by demodulation and error correction / decoding), and the P1 symbol control information 7302 is output.
The OFDM system related processing units 5600_X and 5600_Y receive P1 symbol control information 7302 as input, and based on this information, the signal processing method for the OFDM system is changed. (This is because, as described in the A1 embodiment, the P1 symbol contains information on the transmission method of the signal transmitted by the broadcasting station.)
The P2 symbol (may include Signaling PLP) demodulation unit 7303 receives the signals 704_X, 704_Y and P1 symbol control information 7302 after signal processing as inputs, performs signal processing based on the P1 symbol control information, and demolishes. (Including error correction / decoding) is performed, and P2 symbol control information 7304 is output.

The control information generation unit 7305 receives the P1 symbol control information 7302 and the P2 symbol control information 7304 as inputs, and outputs the control information (related to the reception operation) as a spring and a control signal 7306. Then, the control signal 7306 is input to each unit as shown in FIG. 73.

The signal processing unit 711 takes the signals 706_1, 706_2, 708_1, 708_2, 704_X, 704_Y, and the control signal 7306 as inputs, and uses the transmission method / modulation used to transmit each PLP included in the control signal 7306. Based on information such as the method, error correction coding method, error correction coding coding rate, and error correction code block size, demodulation and decoding are performed, and the received data 712 is output.

At this time, when the transmission method of any of the spatial multiplex MIMO transmission method, the MIMO method using a fixed precoding matrix, and the precoding method of regularly switching the precoding matrix is used to transmit the PLP, The signal processing unit 711 may perform demodulation processing using the relational expression of the equation (41) of (Equation 41) and the equation (143) of (Equation 153). The channel matrix (H) can be obtained from the output results of the channel fluctuation estimation unit (705_1, 705_2, 707_1, 707_2), and the precoding matrix (F or W) can be obtained from the output result of the matrix depending on the transmission method used. The configuration is different. In particular, when the precoding method of regularly switching the precoding matrix is used, the precoding matrix used is switched and demodulated each time. Further, even when the spatiotemporal block code is used, demodulation is performed using the channel estimated value and the received (baseband) signal.

FIG. 74 shows an example of the configuration of the receiving device of the terminal when the transmitting device of the broadcasting station of FIG. 72 applies the precoding method of regularly switching the precoding matrix. Those that operate in the same manner as in FIG. 73 are designated by the same reference numerals.

The difference between the receiving device of FIG. 74 and the receiving device of FIG. 73 is that the receiving device of FIG. 73 can receive signals of the DVB-T2 standard and other standards and obtain data, whereas the receiving device of FIG. 74 shows. The receiving device can receive only signals other than the DVB-T2 standard and obtain data.

In FIG. 74, the P1 symbol detection / demodulation unit 7301 receives the signal transmitted by the broadcasting station, inputs the signals 704_X and 704_Y after signal processing, and detects the P1 symbol to perform signal detection and time-frequency synchronization. At the same time, the control information included in the P1 symbol is obtained (by demodulation and error correction / decoding), and the P1 symbol control information 7302 is output.

The OFDM system related processing units 5600_X and 5600_Y receive P1 symbol control information 7302 as input, and based on this information, the signal processing method for the OFDM system is changed. (This is because, as described in the A1 embodiment, the P1 symbol contains information on the transmission method of the signal transmitted by the broadcasting station.)
The first and second Signaling data demodulation unit 7401 receives the signal 704_X, 704_Y and P1 symbol control information 7302 after signal processing, performs signal processing based on the P1 symbol control information, and demolishes (error correction and decoding). Includes), and outputs the first and second Signaling data control information 7402.

The control information generation unit 7305 takes the P1 symbol control information 7302 and the first and second Signaling data control information 7402 as inputs, and outputs the control information (related to the reception operation) as a spring and a control signal 7306. Then, the control signal 7306 is input to each unit as shown in FIG. 73.

The signal processing unit 711 takes the signals 706_1, 706_2, 708_1, 708_2, 704_X, 704_Y, and the control signal 7306 as inputs, and uses the transmission method / modulation used to transmit each PLP included in the control signal 7306. Based on information such as the method, error correction coding method, error correction coding coding rate, and error correction code block size, demodulation and decoding are performed, and the received data 712 is output.

At this time, when the transmission method of any of the spatial multiplex MIMO transmission method, the MIMO method using a fixed precoding matrix, and the precoding method of regularly switching the precoding matrix is used to transmit the PLP, The signal processing unit 711 may perform demodulation processing using the relational expression of the equation (41) of (Equation 41) and the equation (143) of (Equation 153). The channel matrix (H) can be obtained from the output results of the channel fluctuation estimation unit (705_1, 705_2, 707_1, 707_2), and the precoding matrix (F or W) can be obtained from the matrix according to the transmission method used. The configuration is different. In particular, when the precoding method of regularly switching the precoding matrix is used, the precoding matrix used is switched and demodulated each time. Further, even when the spatiotemporal block code is used, demodulation is performed using the channel estimated value and the received (baseband) signal.

FIG. 75 shows the configuration of the receiving device of the terminal corresponding to the DVB-T2 standard and corresponding to the standard other than DVB-T2, and the one that operates in the same manner as in FIGS. 7, 56, and 73. Have the same code.

The difference between the receiving device of FIG. 75 and the receiving devices of FIGS. 73 and 74 is that the receiving device of FIG. 75 can demodulate both the DVB-T2 standard and the signals of other standards. It is a point that includes the P2 symbol or the first and second Signaling data demodulation units 7501.

The first and second Signaling data demodulation units 7501 are the signals 704_X, 70 after signal processing.
4_Y and P1 symbol control information 7302 are input, and based on the P1 symbol control information, it is determined whether the received signal is a signal corresponding to the DVB-T2 standard or a signal corresponding to another standard. (For example, it can be determined by Table 3), signal processing is performed, demodulation (including error correction / decoding) is performed, and control information including information on what standard the received signal corresponds to is performed. Outputs 7502. Other parts have the same operation as in FIGS. 73 and 74.

As described above, by configuring the receiving device as shown in the present embodiment, the signal transmitted by the transmitting device of the broadcasting station described in the embodiment A1 is received and appropriate signal processing is performed. Therefore, data with high reception quality can be obtained. In particular, when the signal of the precoding method for regularly switching the precoding matrix is received, it is possible to realize both improvement of data transmission efficiency and improvement of data reception quality in the LOS environment.

In the present embodiment, since the configuration of the receiving device corresponding to the transmission method of the broadcasting station described in the A1 embodiment has been described, the configuration of the receiving device when the number of receiving antennas is two has been described. The number of antennas of the device is not limited to two, and the same can be applied to three or more antennas. At this time, the diversity gain is improved, so that the data reception quality can be improved. Further, even when the number of transmitting antennas of the transmitting device of the broadcasting station is 3 or more and the number of transmitting modulation signals is 3 or more, the same can be performed by increasing the number of receiving antennas of the receiving device of the terminal. .. At this time, it is desirable to apply a precoding method for regularly switching the precoding matrix as a transmission method.

Further, examples of the precoding method for regularly switching the precoding matrix are as shown in the first to sixteenth embodiments. However, the method of regularly switching the precoding matrix is not limited to the methods shown in the first to the sixth embodiments, and a plurality of precoding matrices are prepared and a plurality of prepared ones are prepared. If one precoding matrix is selected for each slot from the precoding matrices of the above, precoding is performed, and the precoding matrix to be used regularly is switched for each slot, the present embodiment is: It can be carried out in the same way.


(Embodiment A3)
In the system in which the precoding method for regularly switching the precoding matrix is applied to the DVB-T2 standard described in the embodiment A1, there is control information for specifying the pilot insertion pattern in L1 Pre-Signalling. In the present embodiment, a method of applying the precoding method of regularly switching the precoding matrix when changing the pilot insertion pattern by L1 pre-signaling will be described.

76 and 77 show an example of a frame configuration on the frequency-time axis of the DVB-T2 standard when a transmission method of transmitting a plurality of modulated signals from a plurality of antennas is used using the same frequency band. There is. In FIGS. 76 and 77, the horizontal axis represents the frequency, that is, the carrier number, the vertical axis represents the time, and (A) is the frame of the modulated signal z1 in the embodiment described so far. Configuration, (B), shows the frame configuration of the modulated signal z2 in the embodiments described so far. The carrier number is indexed as "f0, f1, f2, ...", And the time is indexed as "t1, t2, t3, ...". Then, in FIGS. 76 and 77, the symbols having the same carrier number and the same time are symbols existing at the same frequency and the same time.

76 and 77 are examples of insertion positions of pilot symbols in the DVB-T2 standard. (In the DVB-T2 standard, when transmitting a plurality of modulated signals using a plurality of antennas, there are eight types of methods regarding the insertion position of the pilot, and FIGS. 76 and 77 show two of them. .)
In FIGS. 76 and 77, two types of symbols, a symbol for a pilot and a symbol for data transmission, are shown. As described in other embodiments, for data transmission of the modulated signal z1 when a precoding method that regularly switches the precoding matrix or a precoding method in which the precoding matrix is fixed is used. The symbol becomes a symbol after weighting and combining of streams s1 and stream s2, and the symbol for data transmission of the modulated signal z2 also becomes a symbol after weighting and combining of streams s1 and stream s2. When the spatiotemporal block code and spatial multiplex MIMO transmission method are used, the symbol for data transmission of the modulated signal z1 becomes a symbol of either stream s1 or stream s2, and for data transmission of the modulated signal z2. The symbol of is also a symbol of either stream s1 or stream s2. In FIGS. 76 and 77, the symbol for the pilot is assigned either an index of "PP1" or "PP2", and "PP1" and "PP2" are pilot symbols having different configuration methods. As mentioned above, in the DVB-T2 standard, the broadcasting station can specify one of eight types of pilot insertion methods (the insertion frequency in the frame of the pilot symbol is different). , FIG. 76 and FIG. 77 show two types of pilot insertion methods out of the above-mentioned eight types. Then, the information regarding the pilot insertion method selected from the eight types by the broadcasting station is transmitted to the terminal as the transmission destination as the L1 Pre-Signalling data of the P2 symbols described in the A1 embodiment.

Next, a method of applying the precoding method for regularly switching the precoding matrix according to the pilot insertion method will be described. As an example, there are 10 different precoding matrices F prepared in the precoding method for regularly switching the precoding matrix, and the precoding matrices are F [0], F [1], F [2], F [ It shall be expressed as 3], F [4], F [5], F [6], F [7], F [8], F [9].

In the frame configuration on the frequency-time axis of FIG. 76, the situation when the precoding matrix is assigned when the precoding method of regularly switching the precoding matrix is applied is shown in FIG. 78 and the frequency-time of FIG. 77. FIG. 79 shows the situation when the precoding matrix is assigned when the precoding method for regularly switching the precoding matrix is applied in the frame configuration in. For example, in both the frame configuration of the modulated signal z1 of FIG. 78 (A) and the frame configuration of the modulated signal z2 of (B), "# 1" is described in the symbols of f1 and t1, but this is , F1, t1 symbols mean that precoding is performed using the precoding matrix of F [1]. Therefore, in FIGS. 78 and 79, "#Z" is described in the symbols of the carrier fx (x = 0, 1, 2, ...) And ty (y = 1, 2, 3, ...). In this case, the symbols of fx and ty mean that precoding is performed using the precoding matrix of F [Z].

As a matter of course, the method of inserting the pilot symbol (insertion interval) is different in the frame configuration on the frequency-time axis of FIGS. 78 and 79. Also, for pilot symbols, the precoding method of switching regular precoding matrices is not applied. Therefore, in FIGS. 78 and 79, the precoding method for regularly switching the precoding matrix with the same period (the number of different precoding matrices prepared as the precoding method for regularly switching the precoding matrix) is applied. However, as can be seen from FIGS. 78 and 79, in FIGS. 78 and 79, even if the symbols have the same carrier and the same time, the assigned precoding matrix may be different. For example, the symbols of f5 and t2 in FIG. 78 are shown as "# 7", and precoding is performed by the precoding matrix in F [7]. On the other hand, the symbols of f5 and t2 in FIG. 79 are shown as "# 8", and precoding is performed by the precoding matrix in F [8].

Therefore, according to the L1 Pre-Signalling data, the broadcasting station transmits the control information indicating the pilot pattern (pilot insertion method), and the control information indicating this pilot pattern indicates the pilot insertion method and at the same time, Table 4 Alternatively, when the broadcasting station selects the precoding method for regularly switching the precoding matrix as the transmission method for transmitting the PLP according to the control information in Table 5, the precoding matrix in the precoding method for regularly switching the precoding matrix. May indicate how to allocate. Therefore, the receiving device of the terminal that receives the modulated signal transmitted by the broadcasting station obtains the control information indicating the pilot pattern in the L1 Pre-Signnaling data, and the precoding matrix in the precoding method that regularly switches the precoding matrix. You can know how to assign. (At this time, it is premised that the broadcasting station selects the precoding method for regularly switching the precoding matrix as the transmission method for transmitting the PLP according to the control information in Table 4 or Table 5.) Here, L1 Pre-Signalling data is used for explanation, but in the case of the frame configuration of FIG. 70 in which the P2 symbol does not exist, precoding in the pilot pattern and the precoding method in which the precoding matrix is regularly switched. The control information indicating the matrix allocation method exists in the first and second Signaling data.

Further another example will be described below. For example, as shown in Table 2, when the precoding matrix to be used in the precoding method for regularly switching the precoding matrix is determined at the same time as the modulation method is specified, it can be considered in the same manner as the above description. By transmitting only the pilot pattern control information, the PLP transmission method control information, and the modulation method control information of the P2 symbol, the receiving device of the terminal regularly precodes by obtaining these control information. Precoding method for switching matrices It is possible to estimate the allocation method (on the frequency-time axis) of the precoding matrix. Similarly, as shown in Table 1B, when the modulation method and the error correction code method are specified and at the same time the precoding matrix used in the precoding method for regularly switching the precoding matrix is determined, the P2 symbol, By transmitting only the pilot pattern control information, the PLP transmission method control information, the modulation method control information, and the error correction code method, the receiving device of the terminal regularly obtains these control information. Switching the precoding matrix It is possible to estimate the allocation method (on the frequency-time axis) of the precoding matrix of the precoding method.

However, unlike Tables 1B and 2, even if the modulation method is determined, one of two or more different precoding methods for regularly switching the precoding matrix can be selected (for example, regular precoding with different periods). Even if you can select from the precoding method that switches the coding matrix, or you can select from the precoding method that switches the precoding matrix in a different regular manner), or even if you decide the modulation method / error correction method, 2 You can choose one of more than one different regular precoding matrix switching method, or you can choose from two or more different regular precoding matrix switching methods even if you decide on an error correction method. In this case, as shown in Table 5, the precoding matrix switching method of the precoding method for regularly switching the precoding matrix is transmitted, but in addition to this, the precoding method for regularly switching the precoding matrix is pre-coded. Information about how the coding matrix is allocated (on the frequency-time axis) may be transmitted.

Table 7 shows a configuration example of control information regarding information on the allocation method (on the frequency-time axis) of the precoding matrix of the precoding method that regularly switches the precoding matrix at that time.

For example, it is assumed that the transmitting device of the broadcasting station selects FIG. 76 as the insertion pattern of the pilot, and selects the method A as the precoding method for regularly switching the precoding matrix. At this time, it is assumed that the transmitting device of the broadcasting station can select either FIG. 78 or FIG. 80 as the allocation method (on the frequency-time axis) of the precoding matrix. For example, when the transmitting device of the broadcasting station selects FIG. 78, “MATRIX_FRAME_ARRANGEMENT” in Table 7 is set to “00”, and when FIG. 80 is selected, “MATRIX_FRAME_ARRANGEMENT” in Table 7 is set to “01”. Shall be. Then, the receiving device of the terminal can know the allocation method (on the frequency-time axis) of the precoding matrix by obtaining the control information in Table 7. The control information in Table 7 can be transmitted by the P2 symbol, and can also be transmitted by the first, second, and Signalling data.

As described above, the precoding matrix allocation method of the precoding method that regularly switches the precoding matrix based on the pilot insertion method is realized, and the information of the allocation method is accurately transmitted to the transmission destination. Therefore, the receiving device of the terminal as the transmission partner can obtain the effect that both the improvement of the data transmission efficiency and the improvement of the data reception quality can be achieved.

In the present embodiment, the case where the number of transmission signals of the broadcasting station is set to 2 has been described, but also when the number of transmitting antennas of the transmitting device of the broadcasting station is set to 3 or more and the number of transmitted modulation signals is set to 3 or more. , Can be carried out in the same way. Further, examples of the precoding method for regularly switching the precoding matrix are as shown in the first to sixteenth embodiments. However, the method of regularly switching the precoding matrix is not limited to the methods shown in the first to the sixth embodiments, and a plurality of precoding matrices are prepared and a plurality of prepared ones are prepared. If one precoding matrix is selected for each slot from the precoding matrices of the above, precoding is performed, and the precoding matrix to be used regularly is switched for each slot, the present embodiment is: It can be carried out in the same way.


(Embodiment A4)
In the present embodiment, in the precoding method of regularly switching the precoding matrix, a repetition method for improving the reception quality of data will be described.

The configuration of the transmitter to which the precoding method of regularly switching the precoding matrix is applied is as shown in FIGS. 3, 4, 13, 40, and 53, but in the present embodiment, it is regular. An application example in which repetition is applied to the precoding method for switching the precoding matrix will be described.

FIG. 81 shows an example of the configuration of the signal processing unit of the precoding method in which the precoding matrix is regularly switched when the repetition is applied. FIG. 81 corresponds to the signal processing unit 5308 when considered in FIG. 53.

The baseband signal 8101_1 of FIG. 81 corresponds to the baseband signal 5307_1 of FIG. 53, is a baseband signal after mapping, and becomes a baseband signal of the stream s1. Similarly, the baseband signal 8101_2 of FIG. 81 corresponds to the baseband signal 5307_2 of FIG. 53, is a baseband signal after mapping, and becomes a baseband signal of the stream s2.

The signal processing unit (replication unit) 8102_1 receives the baseband signal 8101_1 and the control signal 8104 as inputs, and duplicates the baseband signal based on the information on the number of repetitions included in the control signal 8104. For example, when the information on the number of repetitions included in the control signal 8104 is indicated as four repetitions, the baseband signal 8101_1 is a signal of s11, s12, s13, s14, ... With respect to the time axis. If so, the signal processing unit (replication unit) 8102_1 duplicates each signal four times and outputs the signal. Therefore, the output of the signal processing unit (replication unit) 8102_1, that is, the baseband signal 8103_1 after the revision outputs four s11s such as s11, s11, s11, and s11 with respect to the time axis, and then s12. , S12, s12, s12, and so on, four s12s are output, and then s13, s13, s13, s13, s14, s14, s14, s14, and so on are output.

The signal processing unit (replication unit) 8102_2 receives the baseband signal 8101_2 and the control signal 8104 as inputs, and duplicates the baseband signal based on the information on the number of repetitions included in the control signal 8104. For example, when the information on the number of repetitions included in the control signal 8104 is indicated as four repetitions, the baseband signal 8101_2 is a signal of s21, s22, s23, s24, ... With respect to the time axis. If so, the signal processing unit (replication unit) 8102_2 duplicates each signal four times and outputs the signal. Therefore, the output of the signal processing unit (replication unit) 8102_2, that is, the baseband signal 8103_2 after the revision outputs four s21s such as s21, s21, s21, and s21 with respect to the time axis, and then s22. , S22, s22, s22, and so on, four s22s are output, and then s23, s23, s23, s23, s24, s24, s24, s24, and so on are output.

The weighted synthesis unit (precoding calculation unit) 8105 is a precoding method in which the baseband signals 8103_1, 8103_2 and the control signal 8104 after revelation are input, and the precoding matrix included in the control signal 8104 is regularly switched. Precoding based on information is performed, that is, weighted synthesis is performed on the baseband signals 8103_1 and 8103_2 after reveification, and the baseband signal 8106_1 (represented as z1 (i) here) after precoding is pre-coded. Outputs the coded baseband signal 8106_2 (here, z2 (i)) (where i represents the order (time or frequency)).
Assuming that the baseband signals 8103_1 and 8103_2 after revelation are y1 (i) and y2 (i), respectively, and the precoding matrix is F (i), the following relationship is established.

However, F [0], F [1], F [2], F [ Assuming that 3], ..., F [N-1], in equation (255), the precoding matrix F (i) is F [0], F [1], F [2], F [3. ], ..., F [N-1] shall be used.

Here, for example, when i is 0, 1, 2, 3, y1 (i) is four replication baseband signals s11, s11, s11, s11, and y2 (i) is four replication bases. It is assumed that the band signals are s21, s21, s21, and s21. Then, it is important that the following conditions are satisfied.

Consider the above in general. When the number of repetitions is K, i is g ₀ , g ₁ , g ₂ , ..., G _K-1 (that is, g _j j is an integer from 0 to K-1), y1 (i) is s11. Suppose that. Then, it is important that the following conditions are satisfied.

Similarly, when the number of repetitions is K and i is h ₀ , h ₁ , h ₂ , ..., H _K-1 (that is, h _j j is an integer from 0 to K-1), y2 (i) Is s21. Then, it is important that the following conditions are satisfied.

At this time, g _j = h _j may or may not hold. By doing so, the same stream generated by repetition can be transmitted by using different precoding matrices, so that the effect of improving the data reception quality can be obtained.

In the present embodiment, the case where the number of transmission signals of the broadcasting station is set to 2 has been described, but also when the number of transmitting antennas of the transmitting device of the broadcasting station is set to 3 or more and the number of transmitted modulation signals is set to 3 or more. , Can be carried out in the same way. When the number of transmitted signals is Q, the number of repetitions is K, i is g ₀ , g ₁ , g ₂ , ..., G _K-1 (that is, g _j j is an integer from 0 to K-1). In, yb (i) is assumed to be sb1 (b is an integer from 1 to Q). Then, it is important that the following conditions are satisfied.

However, F (i) is a precoding matrix when the number of transmitted signals is Q.
Next, an embodiment different from that of FIG. 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 82. In FIG. 82, the same reference numerals are given to those operating in the same manner as in FIG. 81. In FIG. 82, the difference from FIG. 81 is that the data is rearranged so that the same data is transmitted from different antennas.

The baseband signal 8101_1 of FIG. 82 corresponds to the baseband signal 5307_1 of FIG. 53, is a baseband signal after mapping, and becomes a baseband signal of the stream s1. Similarly, the baseband signal 8101_2 of FIG. 81 corresponds to the baseband signal 5307_2 of FIG. 53, is a baseband signal after mapping, and becomes a baseband signal of the stream s2.
The signal processing unit (replication unit) 8102_1 receives the baseband signal 8101_1 and the control signal 8104 as inputs, and duplicates the baseband signal based on the information on the number of repetitions included in the control signal 8104. For example, when the information on the number of repetitions included in the control signal 8104 is indicated as four repetitions, the baseband signal 8101_1 is a signal of s11, s12, s13, s14, ... With respect to the time axis. If so, the signal processing unit (replication unit) 8102_1 duplicates each signal four times and outputs the signal. Therefore, the output of the signal processing unit (replication unit) 8102_1, that is, the baseband signal 8103_1 after the revision outputs four s11s such as s11, s11, s11, and s11 with respect to the time axis, and then s12. , S12, s12, s12, and so on, four s12s are output, and then s13, s13, s13, s13, s14, s14, s14, s14, and so on are output.

The signal processing unit (replication unit) 8102_2 receives the baseband signal 8101_2 and the control signal 8104 as inputs, and duplicates the baseband signal based on the information on the number of repetitions included in the control signal 8104. For example, when the information on the number of repetitions included in the control signal 8104 is indicated as four repetitions, the baseband signal 8101_2 is a signal of s21, s22, s23, s24, ... With respect to the time axis. If so, the signal processing unit (replication unit) 8102_2 duplicates each signal four times and outputs the signal. Therefore, the output of the signal processing unit (replication unit) 8102_2, that is, the baseband signal 8103_2 after the revision outputs four s21s such as s21, s21, s21, and s21 with respect to the time axis, and then s22. , S22, s22, s22, and so on, four s22s are output, and then s23, s23, s23, s23, s24, s24, s24, s24, and so on are output.

The sorting unit 8201 receives the baseband signal 8103_1 after the revision, the baseband signal 8103_2 after the revision, and the control signal 8104 as inputs, and sorts the data based on the information of the repetition method included in the control signal 8104. , Outputs the rearranged baseband signals 8202_1 and 8202_2. For example, the baseband signal 8103_1 after revelation is composed of four s11s such as s11, s11, s11, and s11 with respect to the time axis. Similarly, the baseband signal 8103_1 after revelation is composed of four s11s. It is assumed that the time axis is composed of four s21s such as s21, s21, s21, and s21. In FIG. 82, s11 is output as both y1 (i) and y2 (i) of the formula (255), and similarly, s21 is output as both y1 (i) and y2 (i) of the formula (255). Output. Therefore, the same sort as s11 is applied to (s12, s13, ...), And the same sort as s21 is applied to (s22, s23, ...). Therefore, the rearranged baseband signal 8202_1 becomes s11, s21, s11, s21, s12, s22, s12, s22, s13, s23, s13, s23, ..., Which is y1 (of equation (255)). It corresponds to i). The order of s11 and s21 (here, s11, s21, s11 and s21) is not limited to this, and may be any order. Similarly, s12 and s22 also have an order. , S13, and s23 may be in any order. Then, the rearranged baseband signals 8202_2 become s21, s11, s21, s11, s22, s12, s22, s12, s23, s13, s23, s13, ..., And this is y2 (of equation (255)). It corresponds to i). The order of s11 and s21 (here, s21, s11, s21 and s11) is not limited to this, and may be any order. Similarly, s12 and s22 also have an order. , S13, and s23 may be in any order.

The weighted synthesis unit (precoding calculation unit) 8105 is a precoding method in which the rearranged baseband signals 8202_1 and 8202_2 and the control signal 8104 are input, and the precoding matrix included in the control signal 8104 is regularly switched. Information-based precoding is performed, that is, the rearranged baseband signals 8202_1 and 8202_2 are weighted and synthesized, and the precoded baseband signals 8106_1 (here, represented as z1 (i)) are precoded. Outputs the coded baseband signal 8106_2 (here, z2 (i)) (where i represents the order (time or frequency)).
Assuming that the rearranged baseband signals 8202_1 and 8202_2 are y1 (i) and y2 (i) and the precoding matrix is F (i) as described above, the relationship of the equation (255) is established.

However, F [0], F [1], F [2], F [ 3], ・ ・
・, If F [N-1], then in equation (255), the precoding matrix F (i) is F [0], F [1], F [2], F [3], ... , F [N-1] shall be used.

In the above description, the number of repetitions is set to 4, but the number of repetitions is not limited to this. Then, as in the case described with reference to FIG. 81, even in the case of the configuration of FIG. 82, if the conditions of the number 304 to the number 307 are satisfied, high reception quality can be obtained.

The configuration of the receiving device is as shown in FIGS. 7 and 56, and utilizing the fact that the relationship of the equations (144) and (255) is established, the signal processing unit uses (s11, s12, s13, s14). , ...) Are demodulated, and the bits transmitted in (s21, s22, s23, s24, ...) Are demodulated. Each bit may be calculated as a log-likelihood ratio, or may be obtained as a hardness determination value. Further, for example, since s11 has been repeated K times, it is possible to obtain a highly reliable estimated value of the bit transmitted in s1 by using this. The same applies to (s12, s13, ...) And (s21, s22, s23, ...), And a highly reliable estimate of the transmitted bit can be obtained.

In the present embodiment, a method of applying the precoding method of regularly switching the precoding matrix when the repetition is performed has been described. At this time, when there are both a slot that performs repetition and transmits data and a slot that transmits data without repetition, the communication method of the slot that transmits data without repetition is Any transmission method may be used, including a precoding method in which the precoding matrix is regularly switched, and a precoding method in which the precoding matrix is fixed. That is, it is important to use the transmission method of the present embodiment for the slot to which the repetition is performed in order to obtain high data reception quality in the receiving device.

Further, in the system related to the DVB standard described in the first to third embodiments A1 to A3, the P2 symbol and the first and second signalling data need to secure the reception quality from the PLP. When the precoding method of applying the repetition and regularly switching the precoding matrix described in the present embodiment is applied as the method of transmitting the first and second signalling data, the reception quality in the control information receiving device is improved. Therefore, it is important for the stable operation of the system.

In the present embodiment, examples of the precoding method for regularly switching the precoding matrix are as shown in the first to the sixth embodiments. However, the method of regularly switching the precoding matrix is not limited to the methods shown in the first to the sixth embodiments, and a plurality of precoding matrices are prepared and a plurality of prepared ones are prepared. If one precoding matrix is selected for each slot from the precoding matrices of the above, precoding is performed, and the precoding matrix to be used regularly is switched for each slot, the present embodiment is: It can be carried out in the same way.


(Embodiment A5)
In the present embodiment, a method of transmitting a modulated signal by performing common amplification with respect to the transmission method described in the first embodiment A1 will be described.

FIG. 83 shows an example of the configuration of the transmission device, and the same reference numerals are given to those operating in the same manner as in FIG. 52.
The modulated signal generation units # 1 to # M (5201_1 to 5201_M) of FIG. 83 are for generating the processed signals 6323_1 and 6323_2 for the P1 symbol of FIG. 63 or FIG. 72 from the input signal (input data). It outputs the modulation signal z1 (5202_1 to 5202_M) and the modulation signal z2 (5203_1 to 5203_M).

The radio processing unit 8301_1 of FIG. 83 has a modulation signal z1 (5202_1 to 5202_M).
Is used as an input, signal processing such as frequency conversion is performed, amplification is performed, a modulated signal 8302_1 is output, and the modulated signal 8302_1 is output as a radio wave from the antenna 8303_1.

Similarly, the radio processing unit 8301_2 has a modulation signal z1 (5203_1 to 5203_M).
Is used as an input, signal processing such as frequency conversion is performed, amplification is performed, a modulated signal 8302_2 is output, and the modulated signal 8302_2 is output as a radio wave from the antenna 8303_2.

As described above, as compared with the transmission method of the A1 embodiment, a transmission method of simultaneously frequency-converting and amplifying modulated signals of different frequency bands may be adopted.


(Embodiment B1)
Hereinafter, application examples of the transmission method and the reception method shown in each of the above embodiments and a system configuration example using the same will be described.

FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a system including a device that executes the transmission method and the reception method shown in the above embodiment. The transmission method and the reception method shown in each of the above embodiments include a broadcasting station as shown in FIG. 84, a television (television) 8411, a DVD recorder 8412, an STB (Set Top Box) 8413, a computer 8420, and an in-vehicle television. It is carried out in a digital broadcasting system 8400 including various types of receivers such as 8441 and mobile phone 8430. Specifically, the broadcasting station 8401 transmits the multiplexed data in which the video data, the audio data, and the like are multiplexed to a predetermined transmission band by using the transmission method shown in each of the above embodiments.

The signal transmitted from the broadcasting station 8401 is received by an antenna (for example, antennas 8560, 8440) built in or externally installed in each receiver and connected to the receiver. Each receiver demodulates the signal received by the antenna using the receiving method shown in each of the above embodiments, and acquires the multiplexed data. Thereby, the digital broadcasting system 8400 can obtain the effect of the present invention described in each of the above-described embodiments.

Here, the video data included in the multiplexed data is, for example, MPEG (Moving Picture Experts Group) 2 or MPEG4-AVC (Advanced).
It is encoded using a moving image coding method conforming to standards such as Video Coding) and VC-1. The audio data included in the multiplexed data is, for example, Dolby AC (Audio Coding) -3, Dolby Digital Plus, MLP (Meridian Lossless Packing), DTS (Digital Theater Systems), DTS-HD, Linear PCM (Pulse Cod).
It is encoded by a voice coding method such as Modulation).

FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the receiver 8500 that implements the receiving method described in each of the above embodiments. As shown in FIG. 85, as an example of one configuration of the receiver 8500, the modem portion is configured by one LSI (or chipset), and the codec portion is configured by another LSI (or chipset). The configuration method is conceivable. The receiver 8500 shown in FIG. 85 includes a television (television) 8411 shown in FIG. 84, a DVD recorder 8412, an STB (Set Top Box) 8413, a computer 8420, and an in-vehicle television 844.
1 and the configuration provided in the mobile phone 8430 and the like. The receiver 8500 includes a tuner 8501 that converts a high-frequency signal received by the antenna 8560 into a baseband signal, and a demodulation unit 8502 that demodulates the frequency-converted baseband signal to acquire multiplexed data. The receiving method shown in each of the above embodiments is carried out by the demodulation unit 8502, whereby the effect of the present invention described in each of the above embodiments can be obtained.

Further, the receiver 8500 uses a stream input / output unit 8520 that separates video data and audio data from the multiplexed data obtained by the demodulation unit 8502, and a video decoding method corresponding to the separated video data. A signal processing unit 8504 that decodes data into a video signal and decodes the audio data into an audio signal using an audio decoding method that corresponds to the separated audio data, and an audio output unit such as a speaker that outputs the decoded audio signal. It has an 8506 and an image display unit 8507 such as a display that displays the decoded image signal.

For example, the user uses the remote controller (remote controller) 8550 to transmit information on the selected channel (selected (television) program, selected audio broadcast) to the operation input unit 8510. Then, the receiver 8500 demodulates the signal corresponding to the selected channel in the received signal received by the antenna 8560, performs processing such as error correction and decoding, and obtains the received data. At this time, the receiver 8500 is a transmission method included in the signal corresponding to the selected channel (transmission method, modulation method, error correction method, etc. described in the above embodiment) (for this, the embodiment A1. -Method of receiving operation, demodulation method, error correction / decoding, etc. by obtaining the information of the control symbol including the information of the above-described embodiment A4 and also as described in FIGS. By setting correctly, it is possible to obtain the data included in the data symbol transmitted by the broadcasting station (base station). In the above, the user has described an example of selecting a channel by using the remote controller 8550. However, even if the channel is selected by using the channel selection key mounted on the receiver 8500, the same operation as described above is performed. Become.

With the above configuration, the user can watch the program received by the receiver 8500 by the receiving method shown in each of the above embodiments.
Further, the receiver 8500 of the present embodiment demodulates with the demodulation unit 8502 and decodes the error correction to obtain the multiplexed data (in some cases, the signal obtained by demodulation by the demodulation unit 8502). In some cases, the receiver 8500 may perform other signal processing after the error correction / decoding. In the following, the same expression may be applied to this point. Is the same.), Data corresponding to the data (for example, data obtained by compressing the data), moving image, and data obtained by processing audio can be used as a magnetic disk. The recording unit (drive) 8508 for recording on a recording medium such as an optical disk or a non-volatile semiconductor memory is provided. Here, the optical disk is a recording medium such as a DVD (Digital Versaille Disc) or a BD (Blu-ray (registered trademark) Disc) in which information is stored and read out using a laser beam. A magnetic disk is a recording medium such as an FD (Floppy Disk) (registered trademark) or a hard disk (Hard Disk) that stores information by magnetizing a magnetic material using magnetic flux. The non-volatile semiconductor memory is a recording medium composed of semiconductor elements such as a flash memory and a ferroelectric memory (Feroelectric Random Access Memory), and is an SD card using a flash memory or a Flash SSD (Solid State Drive). ) And so on. It should be noted that the types of recording media listed here are just examples, and it goes without saying that recording may be performed using recording media other than the above-mentioned recording media.

With the above configuration, the user records and saves the program received by the receiver 8500 by the receiving method shown in each of the above embodiments, and the data recorded at an arbitrary time after the time when the program is broadcast. Can be read and viewed.

In the above description, the receiver 8500 is demodulated by the demodulation unit 8502, and the multiplexing data obtained by decoding the error correction is recorded by the recording unit 8508. However, the data included in the multiplexing data. Some of the data may be extracted and recorded. For example, when the multiplexed data obtained by demodulating with the demodulating unit 8502 and decoding the error correction includes the contents of the data broadcasting service other than the video data and the audio data, the recording unit 8508 may use the demodulating unit 8502. Video data and audio data may be extracted from the multiplexed data demoded in step 1 and new multiplexed data may be recorded. Further, the recording unit 8508 demodulates with the demodulation unit 8502 and decodes the error correction to obtain new multiplexed data in which only one of the video data and the audio data included in the multiplexed data is multiplexed. May be recorded. Then, the recording unit 8508 may record the content of the data broadcasting service included in the multiplexed data described above.

Furthermore, if the receiver 8500 described in the present invention is mounted on a television, a recording device (for example, a DVD recorder, a Blu-ray (registered trademark) recorder, an HDD recorder, an SD card, etc.), or a mobile phone, the data is demolished. Data, personal information, and records for correcting defects (bugs) in the software used to operate televisions and recording devices are added to the multiplexed data obtained by demodulating in part 8502 and decoding error corrections. If data is included to fix software defects (bugs) to prevent data leakage, you may fix software defects in TVs and recording devices by installing these data. .. Then, when the data includes data for correcting a software defect (bug) of the receiver 8500, the defect of the receiver 8500 can be corrected by this data. As a result, the television, recording device, and mobile phone on which the receiver 8500 is mounted can be operated more stably.

Here, the process of extracting a part of the data from the plurality of data included in the multiplexed data obtained by demodulating with the demodulation unit 8502 and decoding the error correction and multiplexing the data is, for example, the stream input / output unit 8503. It is done in. Specifically, the stream input / output unit 8503 converts the multiplexed data demoded by the demodulation unit 8502 into video data, audio data, data broadcasting service content, etc., in response to an instruction from a control unit such as a CPU (not shown). It separates into multiple data, extracts only the specified data from the separated data and multiplexes it, and generates new multiplexed data. The user may decide, for example, which data should be extracted from the separated data, or may be predetermined for each type of recording medium.

With the above configuration, the receiver 8500 can extract and record only the data necessary for viewing the recorded program, so that the data size of the recorded data can be reduced.

Further, in the above description, it is assumed that the recording unit 8508 records the multiplexed data obtained by demodulating with the demodulating unit 8502 and decoding the error correction. The video data included in the multiplexed data obtained by performing the above is different from the video coding method applied to the video data so that the data size or bit rate is lower than that of the video data. You may record new multiplexed data which is converted into the video data encoded by the conversion method and the converted video data is multiplexed. At this time, the moving image coding method applied to the original video data and the moving image coding method applied to the converted video data may comply with different standards or conform to the same standard. Only the parameters used at the time of encoding may be different. Similarly, the recording unit 8508 demodulates the audio data included in the multiplexed data obtained by demodulating with the demodulating unit 8502 and decoding the error correction so that the data size or bit rate of the audio data is lower than that of the audio data. , The voice data may be converted into voice data encoded by a voice coding method different from the voice coding method applied to the voice data, and new multiplexed data in which the converted voice data is multiplexed may be recorded.

Here, the process of converting the video data and audio data included in the multiplexed data obtained by demodulating with the demodulation unit 8502 and decoding the error correction into video data and audio data having different data sizes or bit rates is performed. For example, it is performed by the stream input / output unit 8503 and the signal processing unit 8504. Specifically, the stream input / output unit 8503 demodulates with the demodulation unit 8502 according to an instruction from a control unit such as a CPU, and decodes the error correction to obtain the multiplexed data as video data, audio data, and the like. Separate into multiple data such as data broadcasting service contents. The signal processing unit 8504 converts the separated video data into video data encoded by a moving image coding method different from the moving image coding method applied to the video data according to an instruction from the control unit. , And the process of converting the separated voice data into voice data encoded by a voice coding method different from the voice coding method applied to the voice data. The stream input / output unit 8503 multiplexes the converted video data and the converted audio data according to an instruction from the control unit, and generates new multiplexed data. Note that the signal processing unit 8504 may perform conversion processing on only one of the video data and the audio data, or perform conversion processing on both, in response to an instruction from the control unit. Is also good. Further, the data size or bit rate of the converted video data and audio data may be determined by the user or may be predetermined for each type of recording medium.

With the above configuration, the receiver 8500 changes the data size or bit rate of video data and audio data according to the data size that can be recorded on the recording medium and the speed at which the recording unit 8508 records or reads the data. can do. As a result, when the data size that can be recorded on the recording medium is smaller than the data size of the multiplexed data obtained by demodulating with the demodulating unit 8502 and decoding the error correction, or when the recording unit records or reads the data. Even if the speed at which the data is performed is lower than the bit rate of the multiplexed data demodled by the demodulator 8502, the recording unit can record the program, so that the user can record the program at any time after the broadcast time of the program. It becomes possible to read and view the data recorded in.

Further, the receiver 8500 includes a stream output IF (Interface) 8509 that transmits the multiplexed data demodulated by the demodulation unit 8502 to an external device via the communication medium 8530. As an example of the stream output IF8509, Wi-Fi (registered trademark) (IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g, IEEE802.11n, etc.), WiGiG, WirelessHD, Bluetooth (registered trademark), Zigbee (registered trademark), etc. Examples thereof include a wireless communication device that transmits multiplexed data modulated using a wireless communication method conforming to the wireless communication standard of the above to an external device via a wireless medium (corresponding to a communication medium 8530). Further, the stream output IF8509 uses a communication method compliant with a wired communication standard such as Ethernet (registered trademark), USB (Universal Serial Bus), PLC (Power Line Communication), and IGMP (registered trademark) (High-Definition Multimedia Communication). It may be a wired communication device that transmits the multiplexed data modulated in use to an external device via a wired transmission line (corresponding to a communication medium 8530) connected to the stream output IF8509.

With the above configuration, the user can use the multiplexed data received by the receiver 8500 by the receiving method shown in each of the above embodiments in the external device. The use of multiplexed data here means that the user can view the multiplexed data in real time using an external device, record the multiplexed data with a recording unit provided in the external device, and further from the external device. Includes sending multiplexed data to another external device, etc.

In the above description, the receiver 8500 demodulates with the demodulation unit 8502, and the stream output IF8509 outputs the multiplexed data obtained by decoding the error correction. However, the data included in the multiplexed data. Some of the data may be extracted and output. For example, when the multiplexed data obtained by demodulating with the demodulating unit 8502 and decoding the error correction includes the contents of the data broadcasting service other than the video data and the audio data, the stream output IF8509 is set to the demodulating unit 8502. You may output the new multiplexed data by extracting the video data and the audio data from the multiplexed data obtained by demodulating with and decoding the error correction. Further, the stream output IF8509 may output new multiplexed data in which only one of the video data and the audio data included in the multiplexed data demodulated by the demodulation unit 8502 is multiplexed.

Here, the process of extracting a part of the data from the plurality of data included in the multiplexed data obtained by demodulating with the demodulation unit 8502 and decoding the error correction and multiplexing the data is, for example, the stream input / output unit 8503. It is done in. Specifically, the stream input / output unit 8503 broadcasts video data, audio data, and data broadcasting of the multiplexed data demoded by the demodulation unit 8502 in response to an instruction from a control unit such as a CPU (Central Processing Unit) (not shown). It separates into multiple data such as service contents, extracts only the specified data from the separated data and multiplexes it, and generates new multiplexed data. The user may decide which data to extract from the separated data, or may be predetermined for each type of stream output IF8509.

With the above configuration, the receiver 8500 can extract and output only the data required by the external device, so that the communication band consumed by the output of the multiplexed data can be reduced.

Further, in the above description, the stream output IF8509 is demodulated by the demodulating unit 8502 and records the multiplexed data obtained by decoding the error correction. The video data included in the multiplexed data obtained by performing the above is different from the video coding method applied to the video data so that the data size or bit rate is lower than that of the video data. It may be converted into the video data encoded by the conversion method, and new multiplexed data in which the converted video data is multiplexed may be output. At this time, the moving image coding method applied to the original video data and the moving image coding method applied to the converted video data may comply with different standards or conform to the same standard. Only the parameters used at the time of encoding may be different. Similarly, in the stream output IF8509, the audio data included in the multiplexed data obtained by demodulating with the demodulating unit 8502 and decoding the error correction so that the data size or bit rate is lower than that of the audio data. , The voice data may be converted into voice data encoded by a voice coding method different from the voice coding method applied to the voice data, and new multiplexed data in which the converted voice data is multiplexed may be output.

Here, the process of converting the video data and audio data included in the multiplexed data obtained by demodulating with the demodulation unit 8502 and decoding the error correction into video data and audio data having different data sizes or bit rates is performed. For example, it is performed by the stream input / output unit 8503 and the signal processing unit 8504. Specifically, the stream input / output unit 8503 demodulates with the demodulation unit 8502 in response to an instruction from the control unit, and the multiplexed data obtained by decoding the error correction is video data, audio data, and a data broadcasting service. Separate into multiple data such as the contents of. The signal processing unit 8504 converts the separated video data into video data encoded by a moving image coding method different from the moving image coding method applied to the video data according to an instruction from the control unit. , And the process of converting the separated voice data into voice data encoded by a voice coding method different from the voice coding method applied to the voice data. The stream input / output unit 8503 multiplexes the converted video data and the converted audio data according to an instruction from the control unit, and generates new multiplexed data. Note that the signal processing unit 8504 may perform conversion processing on only one of the video data and the audio data, or perform conversion processing on both, in response to an instruction from the control unit. Is also good. Further, the data size or bit rate of the converted video data and audio data may be determined by the user or may be predetermined for each type of stream output IF8509.

With the above configuration, the receiver 8500 can output the video data and the audio data by changing the bit rate according to the communication speed with the external device. As a result, even if the communication speed with the external device is lower than the bit rate of the multiplexed data obtained by demodulating with the demodulation unit 8502 and decoding the error correction, the external device new multiplexing from the stream output IF. Since the demodulated data can be output, the user can use the new multiplexed data in other communication devices.

Further, the receiver 8500 includes an AV (Audio and Visual) output IF (Interface) 8511 that outputs a video signal and an audio signal decoded by the signal processing unit 8504 to an external device to an external communication medium. As an example of the AV output IF8511, wireless communication standards such as Wi-Fi (registered trademark) (IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g, IEEE802.11n, etc.), WiGiG, WirelessHD, Bluetooth (registered trademark), Gigibee, etc. Examples thereof include a wireless communication device that transmits a video signal and an audio signal modulated by using a wireless communication method based on the above to an external device via a wireless medium. Further, the stream output IF8509 connects a video signal and an audio signal modulated by using a communication method compliant with a wired communication standard such as Ethernet (registered trademark), USB, PLC, and HDMI (registered trademark) to the stream output IF8509. It may be a wired communication device that transmits to an external device via the wired transmission line. Further, the stream output IF8509 may be a terminal for connecting a cable that outputs a video signal and an audio signal as analog signals.

With the above configuration, the user can use the video signal and the audio signal decoded by the signal processing unit 8504 in an external device.
Further, the receiver 8500 includes an operation input unit 8510 that receives an input of a user operation. The receiver 8500 switches the power ON / OFF, the receiving channel, the presence / absence of subtitle display, and the language to be displayed based on the control signal input to the operation input unit 8510 according to the user's operation. , Switching various operations such as changing the volume output from the audio output unit 8506, and changing the settings such as the setting of the receivable channel.

Further, the receiver 8500 may have a function of displaying an antenna level indicating the reception quality of the signal being received by the receiver 8500. Here, the antenna level means, for example, RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indicator, Received Signal Strength Indicator, Received Signal Strength), C / N (Carrier-to-noise power) of the signal received by the receiver 8500. , BER (Bit Error Rate), Packet Error Rate, Frame Error Rate, Channel Status Information (Channel)
It is an index indicating the reception quality calculated based on State Information) and the like, and is a signal indicating the signal level and the superiority or inferiority of the signal. In this case, the demodulation unit 8502 includes a reception quality measurement unit that measures RSSI, received electric field strength, C / N, BER, packet error rate, frame error rate, channel state information, etc. of the received signal, and the receiver 8500 is a user. The antenna level (signal level, signal indicating superiority or inferiority of the signal) is displayed on the image display unit 8507 in a user-identifiable format according to the operation of. The display format of the antenna level (signal level, signal indicating superiority or inferiority of the signal) is to display numerical values according to RSSI, received electric field strength, C / N, BER, packet error rate, frame error rate, channel state information, etc. It may be such that different images are displayed according to RSSI, received electric field strength, C / N, BER, packet error rate, frame error rate, channel state information, and the like. Further, the receiver 8500 has a plurality of antenna levels (signal levels, signals) obtained for each of a plurality of streams s1, s2, ... A signal indicating superiority or inferiority) may be displayed, or one antenna level (signal level, signal indicating superiority or inferiority of the signal) obtained from a plurality of streams s1, s2, ... May be displayed. Further, when the video data or audio data constituting the program is transmitted by using the hierarchical transmission method, it is also possible to indicate the signal level (signal indicating superiority or inferiority of the signal) for each layer.

With the above configuration, the user can numerically or visually grasp the antenna level (signal level, signal indicating superiority or inferiority of the signal) when receiving using the receiving method shown in each of the above embodiments. Can be done.

In the above description, the case where the receiver 8500 includes an audio output unit 8506, a video display unit 8507, a recording unit 8508, a stream output IF8509, and an AV output IF8511 has been described as an example, but these configurations have been described. You don't have to have all of them. If the receiver 8500 has at least one of the above configurations, the user can use the multiplexed data obtained by demodulating with the demodulation unit 8502 and decoding the error correction. , Each receiver may be provided with any combination of the above configurations according to the intended use.
(Multiplexed data)
Next, an example of the structure of the multiplexed data will be described in detail. MPEG2-Transport Stream (TS) is generally used as a data structure used for broadcasting, and MPEG2-TS will be described here as an example. However, the data structure of the multiplexed data transmitted by the transmission method and the reception method shown in each of the above embodiments is not limited to MPEG2-TS, and any other data structure will be described in each of the above embodiments. Needless to say, you can get the desired effect.

FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the multiplexed data. As shown in FIG. 86, the multiplexed data is an element that constitutes a program (program or an event that is a part thereof) currently provided by each service, for example, a video stream, an audio stream, or a presentation graphics stream (PG). ), Interactive Grafix Stream (IG), etc., obtained by multiplexing one or more of the elemental streams. If the program provided by the multiplexed data is a movie, the video stream is the main video and sub video of the movie, and the audio stream is the main audio part of the movie and the sub audio that mixes with the main audio, as the presentation graphics stream. Shows each movie subtitle. Here, the main image is a normal image displayed on the screen, and the sub image is an image displayed on a small screen in the main image (for example, a text data image showing the outline of a movie). be. Further, the interactive graphics stream shows an interactive screen created by arranging GUI components on the screen.

Each stream contained in the multiplexed data is identified by a PID, which is an identifier assigned to each stream. For example, 0x1011 for video streams used for movie images, 0x1100 to 0x111F for audio streams, 0x1200 to 0x121F for presentation graphics, and 0x1400 to 0x141F for interactive graphics streams. 0x1B00 to 0x1B1F are assigned to the video stream used for the sub video, and 0x1A00 to 0x1A1F are assigned to the audio stream used for the sub audio to be mixed with the main audio.

FIG. 87 is a diagram schematically showing an example of how the multiplexed data is multiplexed. First, the video stream 8701 composed of a plurality of video frames and the audio stream 8704 composed of a plurality of audio frames are converted into PES packet sequences 8702 and 8705, respectively, and converted into TS packets 8703 and 8706, respectively. Similarly, the data of the presentation graphics stream 8711 and the interactive graphics 8714 are converted into PES packet sequences 8712 and 8715, respectively, and further converted into TS packets 8713 and 8716. The multiplexing data 8717 is configured by multiplexing these TS packets (8703, 8706, 8713, 8716) into one stream.

FIG. 88 shows in more detail how the video stream is stored in the PES packet sequence. The first stage in FIG. 88 shows a video frame sequence of a video stream. The second row shows the PES packet sequence. As shown by arrows yy1, yy2, yy3, and yy4 in FIG. 88, I-pictures, B-pictures, and P-pictures, which are a plurality of Video Presentation Units in the video stream, are divided into pictures and stored in the payload of the PES packet. .. Each PES packet has a PES header, and the PES header stores PTS (Presentation Time-Stamp), which is the display time of the picture, and DTS (Decoding Time-Stamp), which is the decoding time of the picture.

FIG. 89 shows the format of the TS packet that is finally written to the multiplexed data. The TS packet is a 188-byte fixed-length packet composed of a 4-byte TS header having information such as a PID that identifies a stream and a 184-byte TS payload that stores data, and the PES packet is divided and stored in the TS payload. NS. In the case of a BD-ROM, a 4-byte TP_Extra_Header is added to the TS packet to form a 192-byte source packet, which is written to the multiplexed data. Information such as ATS (Arrival_Time_Stamp) is described in TP_Extra_Header. ATS indicates the transfer start time of the TS packet to the PID filter of the decoder. Source packets are lined up in the multiplexed data as shown in the lower part of FIG. 89, and the number incremented from the beginning of the multiplexed data is called an SPN (source packet number).

In addition to each stream such as a video stream, an audio stream, and a presentation graphics stream, the TS packet included in the multiplexed data includes PAT (Program Association Table) and PMT (Program).
Map Table), PCR (Program Lock Reference) and the like. The PAT indicates what the PID of the PMT used in the multiplexed data is, and the PID of the PAT itself is registered as 0. The PMT has the PID of each stream such as video, audio, and subtitles included in the multiplexed data and the attribute information (frame rate, aspect ratio, etc.) of the stream corresponding to each PID, and also contains various descriptors related to the multiplexed data. Have. Descriptors include copy control information that instructs whether to allow or disallow copying of multiplexed data. PCR corresponds to ATS in which the PCR packet is transferred to the decoder in order to synchronize ATC (Arrival Time Clock) which is the time axis of ATS and STC (System Time Clock) which is the time axis of PTS / DTS. Has information on STC time.

FIG. 90 is a diagram illustrating the data structure of the PMT in detail. At the beginning of the PMT, a PMT header describing the length of the data included in the PMT is arranged. Behind it, a plurality of descriptors related to the multiplexed data are arranged. The copy control information and the like are described as descriptors. After the descriptor, a plurality of stream information about each stream included in the multiplexed data is arranged. The stream information is composed of a stream descriptor in which the stream type for identifying the compression codec of the stream and the like, the PID of the stream, and the attribute information of the stream (frame rate, aspect ratio, etc.) are described. There are as many stream descriptors as there are streams in the multiplexed data.

When recording on a recording medium or the like, the multiplexed data is recorded together with the multiplexed data information file.
FIG. 91 is a diagram showing the structure of the multiplexed data file information. As shown in FIG. 91, the multiplexed data information file is the management information of the multiplexed data, has a one-to-one correspondence with the multiplexed data, and is composed of the multiplexed data information, the stream attribute information, and the entry map.

As shown in FIG. 91, the multiplexed data information is composed of a system rate, a reproduction start time, and a reproduction end time. The system rate indicates the maximum transfer rate of the multiplexed data to the PID filter of the system target decoder described later. The ATS interval included in the multiplexed data is set to be less than or equal to the system rate. The playback start time is the PTS of the video frame at the beginning of the multiplexed data, and the playback end time is set by adding the playback interval of one frame to the PTS of the video frame at the end of the multiplexed data.

FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a configuration of stream attribute information included in the multiplexed data file information. As the stream attribute information, as shown in FIG. 92, the attribute information for each stream included in the multiplexed data is registered for each PID. The attribute information has different information for each of the video stream, audio stream, presentation graphics stream, and interactive graphics stream. The video stream attribute information includes what kind of compression codec the video stream was compressed with, what the resolution of the individual picture data that makes up the video stream is, what the aspect ratio is, and the frame rate. It has information such as how much it is. The audio stream attribute information includes what compression codec the audio stream was compressed with, how many channels the audio stream contains, what language it supports, what the sampling frequency is, and so on. Has the information of. This information is used for initializing the decoder before the player plays it.

In the present embodiment, among the above-mentioned multiplexed data, the stream type included in the PMT is used. When the multiplexed data is recorded on the recording medium, the video stream attribute information included in the multiplexed data information is used. Specifically, in the moving image coding method or apparatus shown in each of the above embodiments, the moving image coding shown in each of the above embodiments is applied to the stream type or video stream attribute information included in the PMT. Provide steps or means to set unique information indicating that the video data is generated by the method or device. With this configuration, it becomes possible to distinguish between the video data generated by the moving image coding method or the apparatus shown in each of the above embodiments and the video data conforming to other standards.

FIG. 93 shows an example of the configuration of the video / audio output device 9300 including the receiving device 9304 that receives the video and audio data transmitted from the broadcasting station (base station) or the modulated signal including the data for data broadcasting. Is shown. The configuration of the receiving device 9304 corresponds to the receiving device 8500 shown in FIG. 85. The video / audio output device 9300 is equipped with an OS (Operating System), for example, and is used for a communication device 9306 (for example, a wireless LAN (Local Area Network) or an ether net) for connecting to the Internet. Communication device) is installed. As a result, in the part 9301 that displays the image,
It is possible to simultaneously display video and audio data, video 9302 in data for data broadcasting, and hypertext (World Wide Web (WWW)) 9303 provided on the Internet. .. Then, by operating the remote controller (which may be a mobile phone or keyboard) 9307, either the video 9302 in the data for data broadcasting or the hypertext 9303 provided on the Internet is selected and the operation is changed. Will be done. For example, when the hypertext 9303 provided on the Internet is selected, the displayed WWW site can be changed by operating the remote controller. When the video 9302 in the video and audio data or the data for data broadcasting is selected, the channel selected by the remote controller 9307 (selected (television) program, selected audio broadcast). Send information. Then, the IF 9305 acquires the information transmitted by the remote controller, and the receiving device 9304 demodulates the signal corresponding to the selected channel, performs processing such as error correction and decoding, and obtains the received data. At this time, the receiving device 9304 describes the transmission method included in the signal corresponding to the selected channel (this is described in Embodiments A1 to A4, and is also described in FIGS. 5 and 41. By obtaining the information of the control symbol including the information of), the data symbol transmitted by the broadcasting station (base station) can be included by correctly setting the receiving operation, the demodulation method, the error correction decoding, etc. It is possible to obtain the data to be obtained. In the above description, the user has described an example in which the channel is selected by the remote controller 9307, but the same as above can be obtained even if the channel is selected by using the channel selection key mounted on the video / audio output device 9300. It becomes an operation.

Further, the video / audio output device 9300 may be operated using the Internet. For example, recording (memory) is reserved for the video / audio output device 9300 from another terminal connected to the Internet. (Therefore, the video / audio output device 9300 has a recording unit 8508 as shown in FIG. 85.) Then, before starting recording, the channel is selected, and the receiving device 9304 Will demodulate the signal corresponding to the selected channel, perform processing such as error correction and decoding, and obtain received data. At this time, the receiving device 9304 is a transmission method included in the signal corresponding to the selected channel (transmission method, modulation method, error correction method, etc. described in the above embodiment) (for this, the embodiment A1. -Method of receiving operation, demodulation method, error correction / decoding, etc. by obtaining the information of the control symbol including the information of the above-described embodiment A4 and also as described in FIGS. By setting correctly, it is possible to obtain the data included in the data symbol transmitted by the broadcasting station (base station).

(Other supplements)
In the present specification, it is considered that a transmitting device is provided in, for example, a communication / broadcasting device such as a broadcasting station, a base station, an access point, a terminal, or a mobile phone (mobile phone). It is conceivable that the receiving device is provided in a communication device such as a television, a radio, a terminal, a personal computer, a mobile phone, an access point, or a base station. Further, the transmitting device and the receiving device in the present invention are devices having a communication function, and the device has some kind of interface to a device for executing an application such as a television, a radio, a personal computer, and a mobile phone. For example, it may be possible to connect via USB).

Further, in the present embodiment, symbols other than the data symbols, for example, pilot symbols (preambles, unique words, postambles, reference symbols, etc.), symbols for control information, and the like are arranged in the frame regardless of how they are arranged. good. And here, it is named as a pilot symbol and a symbol for control information, but any naming method may be used, and the function itself is important.

The pilot symbol may be, for example, a known symbol modulated using PSK modulation in the transceiver (or by synchronizing the receiver, the receiver may be able to know the symbol transmitted by the transmitter. The receiver may use this symbol to perform frequency synchronization, time synchronization, channel estimation (estimation of CSI (Channel State Information)), signal detection, and the like. Become.

In addition, the symbol for control information is information that needs to be transmitted to the communication partner (for example, the modulation method / error correction coding method used for communication) in order to realize communication other than data (application, etc.). It is a symbol for transmitting error correction coding method coding rate, setting information in the upper layer, etc.).

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments 1 to 5, and can be modified in various ways. For example, in the above-described embodiment, the case of performing as a communication device is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and this communication method can also be performed as software.

Further, in the above, the precoding switching method in the method of transmitting the two modulated signals from the two antennas has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the four mapped signals are precoded and 4 In the method of generating one modulated signal and transmitting it from four antennas, that is, the method of precoding the N mapped signals, generating N modulated signals, and transmitting them from N antennas. Similarly, the precoding weight (matrix) can be changed as well as the precoding switching method.


In this specification, terms such as "precoding", "precoding weight", and "precoding matrix" are used, but the term itself may be any one (for example, it may be called a codebook). Good), in the present invention, the signal processing itself is important.

Further, in this specification, the receiving device is described using ML calculation, APP, Max-logAPP, ZF, MMSE, etc., but as a result, the soft judgment result of each bit of the data transmitted by the transmitting device (the soft judgment result of each bit of the data transmitted by the transmitting device ( Log-likelihood, log-likelihood ratio) and hardness determination result (“0” or “1”) will be obtained, but these may be collectively referred to as detection, demodulation, detection, estimation, and separation.

Different data may be transmitted or the same data may be transmitted depending on the streams s1 (t) and s2 (t).
A precoding matrix that regularly switches the precoding matrix for two streams of baseband signals s ₁ (i) and s ₂ (i) (where i represents the order (of time or frequency (carrier))). In the precoded baseband signals z ₁ (i) and z ₂ (i) generated by coding, the in-phase I component of the precoded baseband signal z ₁ (i) is referred to as I ₁ (i). the quadrature component _Q 1 and _{(i), I 2 (i} ) an in-phase I component of the baseband signal _z 2 after precoding (i), the quadrature component and _Q 2 (i). At this time, the baseband components are replaced, and
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{1 (i) after replacement is I 1} (i), the orthogonal component is Q ₂ (i), and the in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 2 (i) after replacement is I 2} (i). ), Q ₁ (i)
And then, the transmitting antenna 1 a modulated signal corresponding to the baseband signal r ₁ after the replacement _(i), a modulated signal corresponding to the transmitting antenna 2 into a baseband signal r ₂ after replacement _(i), the same frequency at the same time The modulated signal corresponding to the replaced baseband signal r ₁ (i) and the replaced baseband signal r ₂ (i) are transmitted from different antennas at the same time and at the same frequency. May be sent. again,
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{1 (i) after replacement is I 1} (i), and the orthogonal component is I ₂ (
i) The in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 2 (i) after replacement is Q 1} (i), and the orthogonal component is Q ₂ (i).
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{1 (i) after replacement is I 2} (i), and the orthogonal component is I ₁ (
i) The in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 2 (i) after replacement is Q 1} (i), and the orthogonal component is Q ₂ (i).
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{1 (i) after replacement is I 1} (i), and the orthogonal component is I ₂ (
i), _{Q 2} (i) for the in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 2 (i) after replacement, and Q 1} (i) for the orthogonal component.
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{1 (i) after replacement is I 2} (i), and the orthogonal component is I ₁ (
i), _{Q 2} (i) for the in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 2 (i) after replacement, and Q 1} (i) for the orthogonal component.
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{1 (i) after replacement is I 1} (i), the orthogonal component is Q ₂ (i), and the in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 2 (i) after replacement is Q 1} (i). ), The orthogonal component is I ₂ (i)
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{1 (i) after replacement is Q 2} (i), the orthogonal component is I ₁ (i), and the in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 2 (i) after replacement is I 2} (i). ), Q ₁ (i)
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{1 (i) after replacement is Q 2} (i), the orthogonal component is I ₁ (i), and the in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 2 (i) after replacement is Q 1} (i). ), The orthogonal component is I ₂ (i)
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{2 (i) after replacement is I 1} (i), and the orthogonal component is I ₂ (
i) The in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 1 (i) after replacement is Q 1} (i), and the orthogonal component is Q ₂ (i).
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{2 (i) after replacement is I 2} (i), and the orthogonal component is I ₁ (
i) The in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 1 (i) after replacement is Q 1} (i), and the orthogonal component is Q ₂ (i).
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{2 (i) after replacement is I 1} (i), and the orthogonal component is I ₂ (
i) The in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 1 (i) after replacement is Q 2} (i), and the orthogonal component is Q ₁ (i).
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{2 (i) after replacement is I 2} (i), and the orthogonal component is I ₁ (
i) The in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 1 (i) after replacement is Q 2} (i), and the orthogonal component is Q ₁ (i).
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{2 (i) after replacement is I 1} (i), the orthogonal component is Q ₂ (i), and the in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 1 (i) after replacement is I 2} (i). ), Q ₁ (i)
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{2 (i) after replacement is I 1} (i), the orthogonal component is Q ₂ (i), and the in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 1 (i) after replacement is Q 1} (i). ), The orthogonal component is I ₂ (i)
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{2 (i) after replacement is Q 2} (i), the orthogonal component is I ₁ (i), and the in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 1 (i) after replacement is I 2} (i). ), Q ₁ (i)
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{2 (i) after replacement is Q 2} (i), the orthogonal component is I ₁ (i), and the in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 1 (i) after replacement is Q 1} (i). ), The orthogonal component is I ₂ (i)

May be. Further, in the above description, precoding is performed on the signals of two streams, and the replacement of the in-phase component and the orthogonal component of the signal after precoding has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and pre-coding is performed for signals having more than two streams. It is also possible to perform coding and replace the in-phase component and the orthogonal component of the signal after precoding.

Both the transmitting antenna of the transmitting device and the receiving antenna of the receiving device, one antenna described in the drawings may be composed of a plurality of antennas.

In this specification, "∀" represents a universal quantifier, and "∃" represents an existential quantifier.

Further, in the present specification, the unit of phase in the complex plane, for example, the argument angle, is referred to as "radian".
By using the complex plane, it can be displayed in polar form as a display in polar coordinates of complex numbers. Complex number
When a point (a, b) on the complex plane is associated with z = a + jb (both a and b are real numbers and j is an imaginary unit), this point is in polar coordinates [r, θ]. If it is expressed,
a = r × cos θ,
b = r × sinθ

Is true, r is the absolute value of z (r = | z |), and θ is the argument. And z = a + jb is expressed as ^{re jθ.}


In the description of the present invention, the baseband signals, s1, s2, z1, and z2 are complex signals. When the in-phase signal is I and the orthogonal signal is Q, the complex signal is I + jQ ( j is an imaginary unit). At this time, I may be zero or Q may be zero.


FIG. 59 shows an example of a broadcasting system using the method of regularly switching the precoding matrix described in the present specification. In FIG. 59, the video coding unit 5901 receives the video as an input, performs video coding, and outputs the data 5902 after the video coding. The voice coding unit 5903 receives voice as input, performs voice coding, and outputs data 5904 after voice coding. The data coding unit 5905 takes data as an input, encodes the data (for example, data compression), and outputs the data 5906 after the data coding. Collectively, these are referred to as an information source coding unit 5900.

The transmission unit 5907 inputs data 5902 after video coding, data 5904 after audio coding, and data 5906 after data coding, and any one of these data or all of these data is used as transmission data. It performs processing such as error correction coding, modulation, and precoding (for example, signal processing in the transmission device of FIG. 3), and outputs transmission signals 5908_1 to 5908_N. Then, the transmission signals 5908_1 to 5908_N are transmitted as radio waves by the antennas 5909_1 to 5909_N, respectively.

The receiving unit 5912 receives the received signal 591 from the antennas 5910_1 to 5910_M.
Using 1-11 to 5911_M as inputs, processing such as frequency conversion, precoding decoding, log-likelihood ratio calculation, error correction decoding, etc. (for example, processing in the receiving device of FIG. 7) is performed, and received data 5913, 5915, 5917 are output. do. The information source decoding unit 5919 receives received data 5913, 5915, 5917 as inputs, and the video decoding unit 5914 inputs received data 5913, decodes for video, outputs a video signal, and outputs the video signal to the television. It is displayed on the display. Further, the voice decoding unit 5916 receives the received data 5915 as an input. Decoding for audio is performed, an audio signal is output, and audio flows from a speaker. Further, the data decoding unit 5918 receives the received data 5917 as an input, decodes the data, and outputs the data information.

Further, in the embodiment for which the present invention is described, in the multi-carrier transmission system such as the OFDM system as described above, the number of encoders possessed by the transmitter is any number. You may. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 4, it is naturally possible to apply the method in which the transmitting device includes one encoder and distributes the output to a multi-carrier transmission system such as the OFDM system. At this time, the wireless units 310A and 310B in FIG. 4 may be replaced with the OFDM method related processing units 1301A and 1301B in FIG. At this time, the description of the OFDM method-related processing unit is as in the first embodiment.

Further, in the first to fifth embodiments A1 to A5, a method of regularly switching the precoding matrix by using a plurality of precoding matrices different from the "method of switching different precoding matrices" described in the present specification is used. Even if it is realized, it can be implemented in the same way.


In addition, for example, a program that executes the above communication method is stored in ROM (Read Only) in advance.
It may be stored in Memory) and the program may be operated by a CPU (Central Processor Unit).

Further, the program for executing the above communication method is stored in a computer-readable storage medium, the program stored in the storage medium is recorded in the RAM (Random Access Memory) of the computer, and the computer is operated according to the program. You may do so.

Then, each configuration such as each of the above-described embodiments may be realized as an LSI (Large Scale Integration), which is typically an integrated circuit. These may be individually integrated into one chip, or may be integrated into one chip so as to include all or a part of the configurations of each embodiment. Although it is referred to as an LSI here, it may be referred to as an IC (Integrated Circuit), a system LSI, a super LSI, or an ultra LSI depending on the degree of integration. Further, the method of making an integrated circuit is not limited to the LSI, and may be realized by a dedicated circuit or a general-purpose processor. An FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) that can be programmed after the LSI is manufactured, or a reconfigurable processor that can reconfigure the connection and settings of circuit cells inside the LSI may be used.

Furthermore, if an integrated circuit technology that replaces an LSI appears due to advances in semiconductor technology or another technology derived from it, it is naturally possible to integrate functional blocks using that technology. There is a possibility of adaptation of biotechnology.
(Other supplement 2)
Two-stream baseband signal s ₁ (i), s ₂ (i) (baseband signal after mapping of a certain modulation method) (where i represents the order (time or frequency (carrier))) contrast, generated performs precoding for switching regularly precoding matrix, in the baseband signal z ₁ after precoding _(i), z 2 _(i), the baseband signal z ₁ after precoding _(i The in-phase I component of) is I ₁ (i), the orthogonal component is Q ₁ (i), the in-phase I component of the _{baseband signal z 2 (i) after precoding is I 2} (i), and the orthogonal component is Q ₂ (I). At this time, the baseband components are replaced, and
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{1 (i) after replacement is I 1} (i), the orthogonal component is Q ₂ (i), and the in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 2 (i) after replacement is I 2} (i). ), Q ₁ (i)
And then, the transmitting antenna 1 a modulated signal corresponding to the baseband signal r ₁ after the replacement _(i), a modulated signal corresponding to the transmitting antenna 2 into a baseband signal r ₂ after replacement _(i), the same frequency at the same time The modulated signal corresponding to the replaced baseband signal r ₁ (i) and the replaced baseband signal r ₂ (i) are transmitted from different antennas at the same time and at the same frequency. May be sent. again,
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{1 (i) after replacement is I 1} (i), and the orthogonal component is I ₂ (
i) The in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 2 (i) after replacement is Q 1} (i), and the orthogonal component is Q ₂ (i).
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{1 (i) after replacement is I 2} (i), and the orthogonal component is I ₁ (
i) The in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 2 (i) after replacement is Q 1} (i), and the orthogonal component is Q ₂ (i).
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{1 (i) after replacement is I 1} (i), and the orthogonal component is I ₂ (
i), _{Q 2} (i) for the in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 2 (i) after replacement, and Q 1} (i) for the orthogonal component.
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{1 (i) after replacement is I 2} (i), and the orthogonal component is I ₁ (
i), _{Q 2} (i) for the in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 2 (i) after replacement, and Q 1} (i) for the orthogonal component.
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{1 (i) after replacement is I 1} (i), the orthogonal component is Q ₂ (i), and the in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 2 (i) after replacement is Q 1} (i). ), The orthogonal component is I ₂ (i)
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{1 (i) after replacement is Q 2} (i), the orthogonal component is I ₁ (i), and the in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 2 (i) after replacement is I 2} (i). ), Q ₁ (i)
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{1 (i) after replacement is Q 2} (i), the orthogonal component is I ₁ (i), and the in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 2 (i) after replacement is Q 1} (i). ), The orthogonal component is I ₂ (i)
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{2 (i) after replacement is I 1} (i), and the orthogonal component is I ₂ (
i) The in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 1 (i) after replacement is Q 1} (i), and the orthogonal component is Q ₂ (i).
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{2 (i) after replacement is I 2} (i), and the orthogonal component is I ₁ (
i) The in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 1 (i) after replacement is Q 1} (i), and the orthogonal component is Q ₂ (i).
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{2 (i) after replacement is I 1} (i), and the orthogonal component is I ₂ (
i) The in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 1 (i) after replacement is Q 2} (i), and the orthogonal component is Q ₁ (i).
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{2 (i) after replacement is I 2} (i), and the orthogonal component is I ₁ (
i) The in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 1 (i) after replacement is Q 2} (i), and the orthogonal component is Q ₁ (i).
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{2 (i) after replacement is I 1} (i), the orthogonal component is Q ₂ (i), and the in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 1 (i) after replacement is I 2} (i). ), Q ₁ (i)
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{2 (i) after replacement is I 1} (i), and the orthogonal component is Q ₂ (
i) The in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 1 (i) after replacement is Q 1} (i), and the orthogonal component is I ₂ (i).
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{2 (i) after replacement is Q 2} (i), the orthogonal component is I ₁ (i), and the in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 1 (i) after replacement is I 2} (i). ), Q ₁ (i)
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{2 (i) after replacement is Q 2} (i), the orthogonal component is I ₁ (i), and the in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 1 (i) after replacement is Q 1} (i). ), The orthogonal component is I ₂ (i)

May be. Further, in the above description, precoding is performed on the signals of two streams, and the replacement of the in-phase component and the orthogonal component of the signal after precoding has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and pre-coding is performed for signals having more than two streams. It is also possible to perform coding and replace the in-phase component and the orthogonal component of the signal after precoding.
Further, in the above example, the replacement of the baseband signals at the same time (same frequency ((sub) carrier)) is described, but the replacement of the baseband signals at the same time does not have to be performed. As an example, it can be described as follows: ・ The in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 1 (i) after replacement is I 1} (i + v), the orthogonal component is Q ₂ (i + w), and the baseband signal r after replacement. _{2 The} in-phase component of (i) is I ₂ (i + w), and the orthogonal component is Q ₁ (i + v).
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{1 (i) after replacement is I 1} (i + v), and the orthogonal component is I.
₂ (i + w), the in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 2 (i) after replacement is Q 1} (i + v), and the orthogonal component is Q ₂ (i + w).
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{1 (i) after replacement is I 2} (i + w), and the orthogonal component is I.
₁ (i + v), the in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 2 (i) after replacement is Q 1} (i + v), and the orthogonal component is Q ₂ (i + w).
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{1 (i) after replacement is I 1} (i + v), and the orthogonal component is I.
₂ (i + w), the in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 2 (i) after replacement is Q 2} (i + w), and the orthogonal component is Q ₁ (i + v).
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{1 (i) after replacement is I 2} (i + w), and the orthogonal component is I.
₁ (i + v), the in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 2 (i) after replacement is Q 2} (i + w), and the orthogonal component is Q ₁ (i + v).
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{1 (i) after replacement is I 1} (i + v), the orthogonal component is Q ₂ (i + w), and the in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 2 (i) after replacement is Q 1} (i + v). ), The orthogonal component is I ₂ (i + w)
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{1 (i) after replacement is Q 2} (i + w), the orthogonal component is I ₁ (i + v), and the in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 2 (i) after replacement is I 2} (i + w). ), The orthogonal component is Q ₁ (i + v)
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{1 (i) after replacement is Q 2} (i + w), the orthogonal component is I ₁ (i + v), and the in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 2 (i) after replacement is Q 1} (i + v). ), The orthogonal component is I ₂ (i + w)
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{2 (i) after replacement is I 1} (i + v), and the orthogonal component is I.
₂ (i + w), the in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 1 (i) after replacement is Q 1} (i + v), and the orthogonal component is Q ₂ (i + w).
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{2 (i) after replacement is I 2} (i + w), and the orthogonal component is I.
₁ (i + v), the in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 1 (i) after replacement is Q 1} (i + v), and the orthogonal component is Q ₂ (i + w).
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{2 (i) after replacement is I 1} (i + v), and the orthogonal component is I.
₂ (i + w), the in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 1 (i) after replacement is Q 2} (i + w), and the orthogonal component is Q ₁ (i + v).
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{2 (i) after replacement is I 2} (i + w), and the orthogonal component is I.
₁ (i + v), the in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 1 (i) after replacement is Q 2} (i + w), and the orthogonal component is Q ₁ (i + v).
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{2 (i) after replacement is I 1} (i + v), the orthogonal component is Q ₂ (i + w), and the in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 1 (i) after replacement is I 2} (i + w). ), The orthogonal component is Q ₁ (i + v)
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{2 (i) after replacement is I 1} (i + v), the orthogonal component is Q ₂ (i + w), and the in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 1 (i) after replacement is Q 1} (i + v). ), The orthogonal component is I ₂ (i + w)
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{2 (i) after replacement is Q 2} (i + w), the orthogonal component is I ₁ (i + v), and the in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 1 (i) after replacement is I 2} (i + w). ), The orthogonal component is Q ₁ (i + v)
-The in-phase component of the baseband signal r _{2 (i) after replacement is Q 2} (i + w), the orthogonal component is I ₁ (i + v), and the in-phase component of the _{baseband signal r 1 (i) after replacement is Q 1} (i + v). ), The orthogonal component is I ₂ (i + w)

FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a baseband signal replacement unit 9402 for explaining the above description. As shown in FIG. 94, in the precoded baseband signals z ₁ (i) 9401_01 and z ₂ (i) 9401_02, the in- _{phase I component of the precoded baseband signals z 1} (i) 9401_01 is set to I ₁ ( i) Let the orthogonal component be Q ₁ (i), let the in-phase I component of the precoded _{baseband signal z 2 (i) 9401_02 be I 2} (i), _{and let the orthogonal component be Q 2} (i). Then, the in-phase component of the replaced baseband signal r _{1 (i) 9403_01 is Ir 1} (i), the orthogonal component is Qr ₁ (i), and _{the in-phase component of the replaced baseband signal r 2} (i) 9403_02 is Ir. ₂ (i), assuming that the orthogonal component is Qr ₂ (i), the replacement baseband signal r ₁ (i) 9403_01 in-phase component Ir ₁ (i), the orthogonal component Qr ₁ (i), and the replacement baseband. The in- _{phase component Ir 2} (i) of the _{signal r 2} (i) 9403_02 _{and the orthogonal component Qr 2} (i) are represented by any of those described above. In this example, the replacement of the baseband signal after precoding at the same time (same frequency ((sub) carrier)) has been described, but as described above, different times (different frequencies ((sub) carriers))). The baseband signal may be replaced after the precoding of.
Then, the modulated signal corresponding to the replaced baseband signal r ₁ (i) 9403_01 is transmitted from the transmitting antenna 1, and the modulated signal corresponding to the replaced baseband signal r ₂ (i) 9403_02 is transmitted from the transmitting antenna 2 at the same time. _{The modulated signal corresponding to the replaced baseband signal r 1} (i) 9403_01 and the replaced baseband signal r ₂ (i) 9403_02 are transmitted from different antennas at the same time, such as transmitting using the same frequency. It will be transmitted using the same frequency.

In the method of arranging the symbols described in the first to fifth embodiments and the first embodiment, a plurality of precoding matrices different from the "method of switching between different precoding matrices" described in the present specification are used. The same can be applied to the precoding method of regularly switching the precoding matrix. The same applies to other embodiments. In the following, a plurality of different precoding matrices will be supplementarily described.
F [0], F [1], F [2], ・ ・ ・ F [N-3], F [N It shall be represented by -2] and F [N-1]. At this time, the "plurality of different precoding matrices" described above shall satisfy the following two conditions (condition * 1 and condition * 2).

「（xは0からN-1の整数、yは0からN-1の整数であり、x≠yとする）そして、前述を満たす、すべてのx、すべてのyに対して、F[x]≠F[y]が成立するものとする」ということになる。

"(X is an integer from 0 to N-1, y is an integer from 0 to N-1, and x ≠ y) And for all x, all y that satisfy the above, F [x ] ≠ F [y] shall hold. "

なお、２×２の行列を例に補足を行う。２ｘ２の行列Ｒ、Ｓを以下のようにあらわすものとする。

A 2 × 2 matrix will be used as an example for supplementation. It is assumed that the 2x2 matrices R and S are represented as follows.

ａ＝Ａｅ^ｊδ１１、ｂ＝Ｂｅ^ｊδ１２、ｃ＝Ｃｅ^ｊδ２１、ｄ＝Ｄｅ^ｊδ２２、および、ｅ＝Ｅｅ^ｊγ１１、ｆ＝Ｆｅ^ｊγ１２、ｇ＝Ｇｅ^ｊγ２１、ｈ＝Ｈｅ^ｊγ２２であらわされるものとする。ただし、Ａ、Ｂ、Ｃ、Ｄ、Ｅ、Ｆ、Ｇ、Ｈは０以上の実数とし、δ１１、δ１２、δ２１、δ２２、γ１１、γ１２、γ２１、γ２２の単位はラジアンであらわされるものとする。このとき、Ｒ≠Ｓであるとは、（１）ａ≠ｅ、（２）ｂ≠ｆ、（３）ｃ≠ｇ、（４）ｄ≠ｈとしたとき、（１）（２）（３）（４）のうち少なくとも一つが成立することになる。

^{It is assumed} that a = Ae jδ11, b = Be ^jδ12 , c = Ce ^jδ21 , d = De ^jδ22 , and e = Ee ^jγ11 , f = Fe ^jγ12 , g = Ge ^jγ21 , h = He ^jγ22 . However, A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and H are real numbers of 0 or more, and the units of δ11, δ12, δ21, δ22, γ11, γ12, γ21, and γ22 are represented by radians. At this time, R ≠ S means (1) (2) (3) when (1) a ≠ e, (2) b ≠ f, (3) c ≠ g, and (4) d ≠ h. ) At least one of (4) is satisfied.

Further, as the precoding matrix, a matrix in which any one of a, b, c, and d is "zero" in the matrix R may be used. That is, (1) a is zero, b, c, d are not zero, (2) b is zero, a, c, d are not zero, (3) c is zero, a, b. , D may be non-zero, (4) d may be zero, and a, b, and c may be non-zero.

Then, in the system example shown in the description of the present invention, a MIMO-type communication system in which two modulated signals are transmitted from two antennas and each is received by two antennas is disclosed, but the present invention naturally discloses MISO. It can also be applied to a (Multiple Input Single Output) type communication system. In the case of the MISO method, the point that the precoding method of regularly switching a plurality of precoding matrices is applied in the transmitting device is as described above. On the other hand, in the configuration shown in FIG. 7, the receiving device includes the antenna 701_Y and the radio unit 703.
_Y, the channel fluctuation estimation unit 707_1 of the modulation signal z1 and the channel fluctuation estimation unit 707_2 of the modulation signal z2 are not provided. However, even in this case, the processing shown in the present specification can be executed. The data transmitted by the transmitting device can be estimated. It is well known that a plurality of transmitted signals can be received and decoded by one antenna in the same frequency band and at the same time (in receiving one antenna, perform processing such as ML calculation (Max-log APP, etc.)). In the present invention, the signal processing unit 711 of FIG. 7 may perform demodulation (detection) in consideration of the regularly switching precoding method used on the transmitting side.

The present invention can be widely applied to a wireless system that transmits different modulated signals from a plurality of antennas, and is suitable for, for example, an OFDM-MIMO communication system. It also applies to the case of performing MIMO transmission in a wired communication system having a plurality of transmission points (for example, a PLC (Power Line Communication) system, an optical communication system, or a DSL (Digital Subscriber Line) system). At this time, a plurality of modulated signals as described in the present invention will be transmitted using the plurality of transmission points. Further, the modulated signal may be transmitted from a plurality of transmission points.

302A, 302B Encoder 304A, 304B Interleaver 306A, 306B Mapping unit 314 Weighted synthesis information generator 308A, 308B Weighted synthesizer 310A, 310B Radio unit 312A, 312B Antenna 402 Encoder 404 Distributor 504 # 1,504 # 2 Transmit antenna 505 # 1,505 # 2 Receiving antenna 600 Weighted synthesis unit 703_X Radio unit 701_X Antenna 705_1 Channel fluctuation estimation unit 705_2 Channel fluctuation estimation unit 707_1 Channel fluctuation estimation unit 707_2 Channel fluctuation estimation unit 709 Control information decoding unit 711 Signal processing unit 803 INNER MIMO detection unit 805A, 805B Log likelihood calculation unit 807A, 807B Deinteraver 809A, 809B Log likelihood ratio calculation unit 811A, 811B Soft-in / soft-out decoder 813A, 813B Antenna 815 Storage unit 819 Weighting coefficient generation unit 901 Soft-in / soft-out decoder 903 Distributor 1301A, 1301B OFDM method related processing unit 1402A, 1402A Serial parallel conversion unit 1404A, 1404B Sorting unit 1406A, 1406B Inverse high-speed Fourier conversion unit 1408A, 1408B Radio unit 2200 Precoding weight matrix Generation unit 2300 Sorting unit 4002 Encoder group

Claims (8)

Select whether or not to perform precoding processing,
Using the first baseband symbol sequence s1 (t) and the second baseband symbol sequence s2 (t), the first transmission symbol sequence z1 (t) and the second transmission symbol sequence z2 (t) are generated (t). Is an integer greater than or equal to 0),
A transmission method in which the first transmission symbol sequence z1 (t) and the second transmission symbol sequence z2 (t) are transmitted from the first antenna and the second antenna at the same frequency and at the same time, respectively.
When performing the precoding process,
For the first baseband symbol sequence s1 (t) and the second baseband symbol sequence s2 (t), N precoding matrices F [i] are provided for each slot defined on the time axis and the frequency axis. The first transmission symbol sequence z1 (t) and the second transmission symbol sequence z2 (t) are generated by performing precoding processing while regularly switching on both the time axis and the frequency axis.
The N precoding matrices F [i] include one or more matrix elements that transform according to i.
i is an integer from 0 to N-1, and N is an integer of 2 or more.
The first transmission symbol sequence z1 (t) includes the first baseband symbol sequence s1 (t) to which the precoding process is applied and the second baseband symbol sequence s2 (t) to which the precoding process is applied. ) And
The second transmission symbol series z2 (t), the pre-coding process has been applied the first base wherein the band symbol sequence s1 (t) and Purikodin grayed processing is applied second baseband symbol series s2 ( including t)
Sending method. Select whether or not to perform precoding processing,
Using the first baseband symbol sequence s1 (t) (t is an integer of 0 or more) and the second baseband symbol sequence s2 (t), the first transmission symbol sequence z1 (t) and the second transmission symbol sequence z2 (t) A signal processing circuit that generates t) and
A transmission circuit that transmits the first transmission symbol sequence z1 (t) and the second transmission symbol sequence z2 (t) from the first antenna and the second antenna at the same frequency and at the same time, respectively.
Is a transmitter including
When performing the precoding process,
For the first baseband symbol sequence s1 (t) and the second baseband symbol sequence s2 (t), N precoding matrices F [i] are provided for each slot defined on the time axis and the frequency axis. The first transmission symbol sequence z1 (t) and the second transmission symbol sequence z2 (t) are generated by performing precoding processing while regularly switching on both the time axis and the frequency axis.
The N precoding matrices F [i] include one or more matrix elements that transform according to i.
i is an integer from 0 to N-1, and N is an integer of 2 or more.
The first transmission symbol sequence z1 (t) includes the first baseband symbol sequence s1 (t) to which the precoding process is applied and the second baseband symbol sequence s2 (t) to which the precoding process is applied. ) And
The second transmission symbol series z2 (t), the pre-coding process has been applied the first base wherein the band symbol sequence s1 (t) and Purikodin grayed processing is applied second baseband symbol series s2 ( including t)
Transmitter. Multiple signals transmitted at the same frequency and at the same time are received from a plurality of transmitting antennas, and the plurality of signals include a coded signal and information indicating whether or not precoding processing is applied.
A receiving method that generates received data by decoding the coded signal based on the information.
The plurality of signals are signals including the first transmission symbol sequence z1 (t) (t is an integer of 0 or more) and the second transmission symbol sequence z2 (t).
If the information indicates that precoding is applicable,
The first transmission symbol sequence z1 (t) and the second transmission symbol sequence z2 (t) are N with respect to the first baseband symbol sequence s1 (t) and the second baseband symbol sequence s2 (t). It is generated by performing precoding processing using the precoding matrices F [i] for each slot defined on the time axis and the frequency axis while regularly switching on both the time axis and the frequency axis.
The N precoding matrices F [i] include one or more matrix elements that transform according to i.
i is an integer from 0 to N-1, and N is an integer of 2 or more.
The first transmission symbol sequence z1 (t) includes the first baseband symbol sequence s1 (t) to which the precoding process is applied and the second baseband symbol sequence s2 (t) to which the precoding process is applied. ) And
The second transmission symbol series z2 (t), the pre-coding process has been applied the first base wherein the band symbol sequence s1 (t) and Purikodin grayed processing is applied second baseband symbol series s2 ( including t)
Receiving method. A receiving circuit that receives a plurality of signals transmitted from a plurality of transmitting antennas at the same frequency and at the same time, and the plurality of signals include a coded signal and information indicating whether or not precoding processing is applied, and a receiving circuit.
A signal processing circuit that generates received data by decoding the coded signal based on the information.
Is a receiving device including
The plurality of signals are signals including the first transmission symbol sequence z1 (t) (t is an integer of 0 or more) and the second transmission symbol sequence z2 (t).
If the information indicates that precoding is applicable,
The first transmission symbol sequence z1 (t) and the second transmission symbol sequence z2 (t) are N with respect to the first baseband symbol sequence s1 (t) and the second baseband symbol sequence s2 (t). It is generated by performing precoding processing using the precoding matrices F [i] for each slot defined on the time axis and the frequency axis while regularly switching on both the time axis and the frequency axis.
The N precoding matrices F [i] include one or more matrix elements that transform according to i.
i is an integer from 0 to N-1, and N is an integer of 2 or more.
The first transmission symbol sequence z1 (t) includes the first baseband symbol sequence s1 (t) to which the precoding process is applied and the second baseband symbol sequence s2 (t) to which the precoding process is applied. ) And
The second transmission symbol series z2 (t), the pre-coding process has been applied the first base wherein the band symbol sequence s1 (t) and Purikodin grayed processing is applied second baseband symbol series s2 ( including t)
Receiver. N is an integer greater than or equal to 3,
The transmission method according to claim 1. N is an integer greater than or equal to 3,
The transmitting device according to claim 2. N is an integer greater than or equal to 3,
The receiving method according to claim 3. N is an integer greater than or equal to 3,
The receiving device according to claim 4.

Images